1-877-275-7048|Free delivery — 48 states|20-year warranty on 12ga
In Stock & Ready to Ship | Lead Time: 4–8 Weeks | RTO from $49/mo

Metal Carports & Carport Kits For Sale

Shop 35+ prefab steel carport sizes from $1,195. Regular, A-Frame & vertical roof styles in 12 or 14 gauge. Free delivery & professional installation on every tubular steel order across all 48 states.

$1,195
Starting Price
35+
Sizes In Stock
20yr
Warranty — 12ga
48
States Covered
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock

Filter Carports

Filters
Product Vehicles
Filter by State

Showing 2521–2560 of 2723 resultsSorted by price: low to high

100x110 metal building: primary product hero render (11,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 36×41 source) from Steel and Stud

100×110 Regional Distribution Center

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×110 Regional Distribution Center | Steel and Stud — From $203,200
12
100×110 Regional Distribution Center
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$231,650$203,200SAVE $28,450
or $4233/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×110Regional Distribution Center
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×110 Regional Distribution Center, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Logistics operators spec the 100×110 distribution center to run full pallet-rack aisles plus a 12-truck dock line along the 110-ft wall. The 18-20 ft eave height clears a 53-ft trailer dock leveler with VRC mezzanine.

You're viewing:Regional Distribution Center·Size100×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$203,200$231,650Save $28,450
or as low as $4233/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×110
100×110
this size
$203,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 11,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 20' Eave
  • Dock-Ready Layout
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X110-REGIONAL-DISTRIBBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your distribution facility.

100 feet wide × 110 feet long. Column-free clear span; 18-ft+ height for 5-tier racking. Logistics operators spec the 100×110 distribution center to run full pallet-rack aisles plus a 12-truck dock line along the 110-ft wall.

Multi-dock loading baysHigh-bay racking aislesOFFICE MEZZANINE + BREAK + RESTROOMS100′ × 110′ · 11,000 sq ft · distribution facility

Multi-dock loading bays · High-bay racking aisles · Office mezzanine + Break + Restrooms

Multi-dock loading bays at the front, high-bay racking aisles in the middle, office mezzanine + break + restrooms at the rear. Capacity: ~220 pallet positions, full forklift ops. The 18-20 ft eave height clears a 53-ft trailer dock leveler with VRC mezzanine room above.

💡 Pro tip:Dock-Ready Layout. Size affords: multiple dock doors, mezzanine office, in-rack sprinklers.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×110 Regional Distribution Center in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Regional Distribution Center.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
11,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Regional Distribution Center spec sheet.

Width100'
Length110' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space11,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Regional Distribution Center.

DAILY USEEveryday regional distribution center
Everyday regional distribution center
11,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a regional distribution center.
STORAGE OVERFLOWregional distribution center + seasonal storage
regional distribution center + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×110 Regional Distribution Center — what makes it different.

11,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4233/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×110 regional distribution center is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4233/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×110?

11,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 110′ footprint with 11,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $88,000–$132,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Regional Distribution Center shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×110 Regional Distribution Center buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×110 Regional Distribution Center

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Regional Distribution Center · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$49,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Regional Distribution Center also viewed:

🌾 100×110

Hay Storage & Equipment Barn

100×110 hay storage & equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hay Storage & Equipment Barn →
🏢 100×110

Auto Dealership & Service Building

100×110 auto dealership & service building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Dealership & Service Building →
🎯 100×110

Indoor Pickleball Complex

100×110 indoor pickleball complex configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Pickleball Complex →
🏢 100×110

Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air)

100×110 aircraft hangar (single-engine to king air) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air) →
🎯 100×110

Event Venue & Wedding Barn

100×110 event venue & wedding barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Event Venue & Wedding Barn →
🌾 100×110

Indoor Riding Arena & Stable

100×110 indoor riding arena & stable configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena & Stable →
🏢 100×110

Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru)

100×110 self-storage facility (drive-thru) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru) →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Regional Distribution Center questions, answered.

How much does a 100×110 regional distribution center cost?

A 100×110 regional distribution center from Steel and Stud starts at $203,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4233/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×110 regional distribution center price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud regional distribution center ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×110 regional distribution center?

Almost always for 11,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud regional distribution center different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×110 regional distribution center need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×110 regional distribution center delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×110 regional distribution center without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4233/month on a 100×110 regional distribution center.

What warranty comes with the 100×110 regional distribution center?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×110 regional distribution center in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×110 regional distribution center meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Regional Distribution Center quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$203,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
100x110 metal building: primary product hero render (11,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 36×41 source) from Steel and Stud

100×110 Regional Distribution Center

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×110 Regional Distribution Center | Steel and Stud — From $203,200
12
100×110 Regional Distribution Center
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$231,650$203,200SAVE $28,450
or $4233/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×110Regional Distribution Center
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×110 Regional Distribution Center, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Logistics operators spec the 100×110 distribution center to run full pallet-rack aisles plus a 12-truck dock line along the 110-ft wall. The 18-20 ft eave height clears a 53-ft trailer dock leveler with VRC mezzanine.

You're viewing:Regional Distribution Center·Size100×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$203,200$231,650Save $28,450
or as low as $4233/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×110
100×110
this size
$203,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 11,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 20' Eave
  • Dock-Ready Layout
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X110-REGIONAL-DISTRIBBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your distribution facility.

100 feet wide × 110 feet long. Column-free clear span; 18-ft+ height for 5-tier racking. Logistics operators spec the 100×110 distribution center to run full pallet-rack aisles plus a 12-truck dock line along the 110-ft wall.

Multi-dock loading baysHigh-bay racking aislesOFFICE MEZZANINE + BREAK + RESTROOMS100′ × 110′ · 11,000 sq ft · distribution facility

Multi-dock loading bays · High-bay racking aisles · Office mezzanine + Break + Restrooms

Multi-dock loading bays at the front, high-bay racking aisles in the middle, office mezzanine + break + restrooms at the rear. Capacity: ~220 pallet positions, full forklift ops. The 18-20 ft eave height clears a 53-ft trailer dock leveler with VRC mezzanine room above.

💡 Pro tip:Dock-Ready Layout. Size affords: multiple dock doors, mezzanine office, in-rack sprinklers.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×110 Regional Distribution Center in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Regional Distribution Center.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
11,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Regional Distribution Center spec sheet.

Width100'
Length110' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space11,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Regional Distribution Center.

DAILY USEEveryday regional distribution center
Everyday regional distribution center
11,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a regional distribution center.
STORAGE OVERFLOWregional distribution center + seasonal storage
regional distribution center + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×110 Regional Distribution Center — what makes it different.

11,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4233/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×110 regional distribution center is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4233/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×110?

11,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 110′ footprint with 11,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $88,000–$132,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Regional Distribution Center shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×110 Regional Distribution Center buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×110 Regional Distribution Center

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Regional Distribution Center · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$49,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Regional Distribution Center also viewed:

🌾 100×110

Hay Storage & Equipment Barn

100×110 hay storage & equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hay Storage & Equipment Barn →
🏢 100×110

Auto Dealership & Service Building

100×110 auto dealership & service building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Dealership & Service Building →
🎯 100×110

Indoor Pickleball Complex

100×110 indoor pickleball complex configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Pickleball Complex →
🏢 100×110

Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air)

100×110 aircraft hangar (single-engine to king air) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air) →
🎯 100×110

Event Venue & Wedding Barn

100×110 event venue & wedding barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Event Venue & Wedding Barn →
🌾 100×110

Indoor Riding Arena & Stable

100×110 indoor riding arena & stable configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena & Stable →
🏢 100×110

Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru)

100×110 self-storage facility (drive-thru) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru) →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Regional Distribution Center questions, answered.

How much does a 100×110 regional distribution center cost?

A 100×110 regional distribution center from Steel and Stud starts at $203,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4233/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×110 regional distribution center price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud regional distribution center ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×110 regional distribution center?

Almost always for 11,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud regional distribution center different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×110 regional distribution center need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×110 regional distribution center delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×110 regional distribution center without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4233/month on a 100×110 regional distribution center.

What warranty comes with the 100×110 regional distribution center?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×110 regional distribution center in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×110 regional distribution center meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Regional Distribution Center quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$203,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
100x110 metal building: primary product hero render (11,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 36×41 source) from Steel and Stud

100×110 Hay Storage & Equipment Barn

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×110 Hay Storage & Equipment Barn | Steel and Stud — From $202,000
12
100×110 Hay Storage & Equipment Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$230,300$202,000SAVE $28,300
or $4208/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×110Hay Storage & Equipment Barn
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×110 Hay Storage & Equipment Barn, built for farm and ranch demands.

Agricultural-industrial operators stack 11,000 sq ft of square-bale hay six high with a center drive lane for the loader tractor. Two 100×110 roll-up doors at the gables let a baler and a combine cross through. The 4:12.

You're viewing:Hay Storage & Equipment Barn·Size100×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$202,000$230,300Save $28,300
or as low as $4208/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×110
100×110
this size
$202,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 11,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • 4:12 Pitch
  • Snow-Rated 65 PSF
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X110-HAY-STORAGE-EQUIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your commodity hay barn.

100 feet wide × 110 feet long. Open gables vent moisture off fresh-cut hay. Agricultural-industrial operators stack 11,000 sq ft of square-bale hay six high with a center drive lane for the loader tractor.

High-stack bale storageEQUIPMENT ALLEYGrain / feed room + scale100′ × 110′ · 11,000 sq ft · commodity hay barn

High-stack bale storage · Equipment alley · Grain / feed room + scale

High-stack bale storage at the front, equipment alley in the middle, grain / feed room + scale at the rear. Capacity: ~2,061 sq bales at 3-high — telehandler stackable higher. Two 100×110 roll-up doors at the gables let a baler and a combine cross through.

💡 Pro tip:Snow-Rated 65 PSF. Size affords: telehandler-height stacking, commodity bays, truck scale apron.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×110 Hay Storage & Equipment Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hay Storage & Equipment Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
11,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hay Storage & Equipment Barn spec sheet.

Width100'
Length110' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space11,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hay Storage & Equipment Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday hay storage & equipment barn
Everyday hay storage & equipment barn
11,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hay storage & equipment barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhay storage & equipment barn + seasonal storage
hay storage & equipment barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×110 Hay Storage & Equipment Barn — what makes it different.

11,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4208/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×110 hay storage & equipment barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4208/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×110?

11,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 110′ footprint with 11,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $88,000–$132,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hay Storage & Equipment Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×110 Hay Storage & Equipment Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×110 Hay Storage & Equipment Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hay Storage & Equipment Barn · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$49,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hay Storage & Equipment Barn also viewed:

🏢 100×110

Regional Distribution Center

100×110 regional distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Regional Distribution Center →
🏢 100×110

Auto Dealership & Service Building

100×110 auto dealership & service building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Dealership & Service Building →
🎯 100×110

Indoor Pickleball Complex

100×110 indoor pickleball complex configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Pickleball Complex →
🏢 100×110

Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air)

100×110 aircraft hangar (single-engine to king air) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air) →
🎯 100×110

Event Venue & Wedding Barn

100×110 event venue & wedding barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Event Venue & Wedding Barn →
🌾 100×110

Indoor Riding Arena & Stable

100×110 indoor riding arena & stable configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena & Stable →
🏢 100×110

Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru)

100×110 self-storage facility (drive-thru) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru) →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hay Storage & Equipment Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 100×110 hay storage & equipment barn cost?

A 100×110 hay storage & equipment barn from Steel and Stud starts at $202,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4208/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×110 hay storage & equipment barn price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud hay storage & equipment barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×110 hay storage & equipment barn?

Almost always for 11,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hay storage & equipment barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×110 hay storage & equipment barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×110 hay storage & equipment barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×110 hay storage & equipment barn without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4208/month on a 100×110 hay storage & equipment barn.

What warranty comes with the 100×110 hay storage & equipment barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×110 hay storage & equipment barn in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×110 hay storage & equipment barn stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Hay Storage & Equipment Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$202,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
100x110 metal building: primary product hero render (11,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 36×41 source) from Steel and Stud

100×110 Hay Storage & Equipment Barn

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×110 Hay Storage & Equipment Barn | Steel and Stud — From $202,000
12
100×110 Hay Storage & Equipment Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$230,300$202,000SAVE $28,300
or $4208/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×110Hay Storage & Equipment Barn
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×110 Hay Storage & Equipment Barn, built for farm and ranch demands.

Agricultural-industrial operators stack 11,000 sq ft of square-bale hay six high with a center drive lane for the loader tractor. Two 100×110 roll-up doors at the gables let a baler and a combine cross through. The 4:12.

You're viewing:Hay Storage & Equipment Barn·Size100×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$202,000$230,300Save $28,300
or as low as $4208/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×110
100×110
this size
$202,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 11,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • 4:12 Pitch
  • Snow-Rated 65 PSF
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X110-HAY-STORAGE-EQUIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your commodity hay barn.

100 feet wide × 110 feet long. Open gables vent moisture off fresh-cut hay. Agricultural-industrial operators stack 11,000 sq ft of square-bale hay six high with a center drive lane for the loader tractor.

High-stack bale storageEQUIPMENT ALLEYGrain / feed room + scale100′ × 110′ · 11,000 sq ft · commodity hay barn

High-stack bale storage · Equipment alley · Grain / feed room + scale

High-stack bale storage at the front, equipment alley in the middle, grain / feed room + scale at the rear. Capacity: ~2,061 sq bales at 3-high — telehandler stackable higher. Two 100×110 roll-up doors at the gables let a baler and a combine cross through.

💡 Pro tip:Snow-Rated 65 PSF. Size affords: telehandler-height stacking, commodity bays, truck scale apron.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×110 Hay Storage & Equipment Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hay Storage & Equipment Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
11,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hay Storage & Equipment Barn spec sheet.

Width100'
Length110' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space11,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hay Storage & Equipment Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday hay storage & equipment barn
Everyday hay storage & equipment barn
11,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hay storage & equipment barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhay storage & equipment barn + seasonal storage
hay storage & equipment barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×110 Hay Storage & Equipment Barn — what makes it different.

11,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4208/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×110 hay storage & equipment barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4208/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×110?

11,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 110′ footprint with 11,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $88,000–$132,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hay Storage & Equipment Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×110 Hay Storage & Equipment Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×110 Hay Storage & Equipment Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hay Storage & Equipment Barn · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$49,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hay Storage & Equipment Barn also viewed:

🏢 100×110

Regional Distribution Center

100×110 regional distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Regional Distribution Center →
🏢 100×110

Auto Dealership & Service Building

100×110 auto dealership & service building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Dealership & Service Building →
🎯 100×110

Indoor Pickleball Complex

100×110 indoor pickleball complex configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Pickleball Complex →
🏢 100×110

Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air)

100×110 aircraft hangar (single-engine to king air) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air) →
🎯 100×110

Event Venue & Wedding Barn

100×110 event venue & wedding barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Event Venue & Wedding Barn →
🌾 100×110

Indoor Riding Arena & Stable

100×110 indoor riding arena & stable configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena & Stable →
🏢 100×110

Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru)

100×110 self-storage facility (drive-thru) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru) →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hay Storage & Equipment Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 100×110 hay storage & equipment barn cost?

A 100×110 hay storage & equipment barn from Steel and Stud starts at $202,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4208/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×110 hay storage & equipment barn price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud hay storage & equipment barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×110 hay storage & equipment barn?

Almost always for 11,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hay storage & equipment barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×110 hay storage & equipment barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×110 hay storage & equipment barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×110 hay storage & equipment barn without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4208/month on a 100×110 hay storage & equipment barn.

What warranty comes with the 100×110 hay storage & equipment barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×110 hay storage & equipment barn in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×110 hay storage & equipment barn stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Hay Storage & Equipment Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$202,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

100×120 Livestock & Dairy Building

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×120 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×120 Livestock & Dairy Building | Steel and Stud — From $220,300
12
100×120 Livestock & Dairy Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$251,150$220,300SAVE $30,850
or $4590/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×120Livestock & Dairy Building
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×120 Livestock & Dairy Building, built for farm and ranch demands.

Dairy operators and feedlot managers use 100×120 to house 80-120 head with feed alley, milking parlor, and a maternity pen under one roof. Open ridge venting and sidewall curtains are spec'd in the customize step, and.

You're viewing:Livestock & Dairy Building·Size100×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$220,300$251,150Save $30,850
or as low as $4590/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×120
100×110
smaller
$202,000
100×120
this size
$220,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Ridge Vent
  • Concrete Kneewall
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X120-LIVESTOCK-DAIRY-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your production livestock barn.

100 feet wide × 120 feet long. Ridge vent + sidewall curtains for tunnel airflow. Dairy operators and feedlot managers use 100×120 to house 80-120 head with feed alley, milking parlor, and a maternity pen under one roof.

Housing rows / free stallsCENTER FEED DRIVEMilk room / handling + office100′ × 120′ · 12,000 sq ft · production livestock barn

Housing rows / free stalls · Center feed drive · Milk room / handling + office

Housing rows / free stalls at the front, center feed drive in the middle, milk room / handling + office at the rear. Capacity: 120 head production capacity. Open ridge venting and sidewall curtains are spec'd in the customize step, and concrete kneewalls with steel above protect the lower panels.

💡 Pro tip:Livestock-Ready Vent. Size affords: curtain sidewalls, handling chute wing, manure alley.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×120 Livestock & Dairy Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Livestock & Dairy Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Livestock & Dairy Building spec sheet.

Width100'
Length120' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Livestock & Dairy Building.

DAILY USEEveryday livestock & dairy building
Everyday livestock & dairy building
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a livestock & dairy building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWlivestock & dairy building + seasonal storage
livestock & dairy building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×120 Livestock & Dairy Building — what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4590/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×120 livestock & dairy building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4590/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×120?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 120′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Livestock & Dairy Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×120 Livestock & Dairy Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×120 Livestock & Dairy Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Livestock & Dairy Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×121×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$54,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Livestock & Dairy Building also viewed:

🏢 100×120

Distribution Warehouse

100×120 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×120

Manufacturing Facility

100×120 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×120

Commercial Workshop

100×120 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×120

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×120 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×120

Aircraft Hangar

100×120 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×120

Cold Storage Facility

100×120 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🎯 100×120

Indoor Riding Arena

100×120 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$219,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×120

Retail & Showroom

100×120 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×120

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×120 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×120

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×120 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
🏢 100×120

Self-Storage Facility

100×120 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Livestock & Dairy Building questions, answered.

How much does a 100×120 livestock & dairy building cost?

A 100×120 livestock & dairy building from Steel and Stud starts at $220,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4590/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×120 livestock & dairy building price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud livestock & dairy building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×120 livestock & dairy building?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud livestock & dairy building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×120 livestock & dairy building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×120 livestock & dairy building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×120 livestock & dairy building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4590/month on a 100×120 livestock & dairy building.

What warranty comes with the 100×120 livestock & dairy building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×120 livestock & dairy building in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×120 livestock & dairy building stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Livestock & Dairy Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$220,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

100×120 Livestock & Dairy Building

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×120 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×120 Livestock & Dairy Building | Steel and Stud — From $220,300
12
100×120 Livestock & Dairy Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$251,150$220,300SAVE $30,850
or $4590/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×120Livestock & Dairy Building
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×120 Livestock & Dairy Building, built for farm and ranch demands.

Dairy operators and feedlot managers use 100×120 to house 80-120 head with feed alley, milking parlor, and a maternity pen under one roof. Open ridge venting and sidewall curtains are spec'd in the customize step, and.

You're viewing:Livestock & Dairy Building·Size100×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$220,300$251,150Save $30,850
or as low as $4590/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×120
100×110
smaller
$202,000
100×120
this size
$220,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Ridge Vent
  • Concrete Kneewall
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X120-LIVESTOCK-DAIRY-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your production livestock barn.

100 feet wide × 120 feet long. Ridge vent + sidewall curtains for tunnel airflow. Dairy operators and feedlot managers use 100×120 to house 80-120 head with feed alley, milking parlor, and a maternity pen under one roof.

Housing rows / free stallsCENTER FEED DRIVEMilk room / handling + office100′ × 120′ · 12,000 sq ft · production livestock barn

Housing rows / free stalls · Center feed drive · Milk room / handling + office

Housing rows / free stalls at the front, center feed drive in the middle, milk room / handling + office at the rear. Capacity: 120 head production capacity. Open ridge venting and sidewall curtains are spec'd in the customize step, and concrete kneewalls with steel above protect the lower panels.

💡 Pro tip:Livestock-Ready Vent. Size affords: curtain sidewalls, handling chute wing, manure alley.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×120 Livestock & Dairy Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Livestock & Dairy Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Livestock & Dairy Building spec sheet.

Width100'
Length120' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Livestock & Dairy Building.

DAILY USEEveryday livestock & dairy building
Everyday livestock & dairy building
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a livestock & dairy building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWlivestock & dairy building + seasonal storage
livestock & dairy building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×120 Livestock & Dairy Building — what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4590/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×120 livestock & dairy building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4590/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×120?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 120′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Livestock & Dairy Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×120 Livestock & Dairy Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×120 Livestock & Dairy Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Livestock & Dairy Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×121×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$54,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Livestock & Dairy Building also viewed:

🏢 100×120

Distribution Warehouse

100×120 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×120

Manufacturing Facility

100×120 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×120

Commercial Workshop

100×120 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×120

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×120 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×120

Aircraft Hangar

100×120 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×120

Cold Storage Facility

100×120 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🎯 100×120

Indoor Riding Arena

100×120 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$219,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×120

Retail & Showroom

100×120 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×120

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×120 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×120

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×120 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
🏢 100×120

Self-Storage Facility

100×120 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Livestock & Dairy Building questions, answered.

How much does a 100×120 livestock & dairy building cost?

A 100×120 livestock & dairy building from Steel and Stud starts at $220,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4590/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×120 livestock & dairy building price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud livestock & dairy building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×120 livestock & dairy building?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud livestock & dairy building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×120 livestock & dairy building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×120 livestock & dairy building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×120 livestock & dairy building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4590/month on a 100×120 livestock & dairy building.

What warranty comes with the 100×120 livestock & dairy building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×120 livestock & dairy building in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×120 livestock & dairy building stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Livestock & Dairy Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$220,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

100×120 Truck & Fleet Service Center

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×120 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×120 Truck & Fleet Service Center | Steel and Stud — From $221,900
12
100×120 Truck & Fleet Service Center
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$252,950$221,900SAVE $31,050
or $4623/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×120Truck & Fleet Service Center
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×120 Truck & Fleet Service Center, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Fleet operators spec 100×120 for a 6-bay heavy-duty service shop with pull-through bays for tractors and 53-foot trailers. The 100-foot length fits a tractor-trailer plus tool cabinets and a parts mezzanine. Spec.

You're viewing:Truck & Fleet Service Center·Size100×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$221,900$252,950Save $31,050
or as low as $4623/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×120
100×110
smaller
$203,600
100×120
this size
$221,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Pull-Through Bays
  • 14x14 Roll-Ups
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X120-TRUCK-FLEET-SERVBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your fleet service center.

100 feet wide × 120 feet long. Drive-through lanes keep vehicles moving one direction. Fleet operators spec 100×120 for a 6-bay heavy-duty service shop with pull-through bays for tractors and 53-foot trailers.

7 maintenance baysWASH BAY + FUELING APRONParts warehouse + dispatch + crew room100′ × 120′ · 12,000 sq ft · fleet service center

7 maintenance bays · Wash bay + fueling apron · Parts warehouse + dispatch + crew room

7 maintenance bays at the front, wash bay + fueling apron in the middle, parts warehouse + dispatch + crew room at the rear. Capacity: full fleet maintenance, 7+ bays. The 100-foot length fits a tractor-trailer plus tool cabinets and a parts mezzanine.

💡 Pro tip:Drive-Through Service. Size affords: drive-through bays, overhead lube system, parts mezzanine.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×120 Truck & Fleet Service Center in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Truck & Fleet Service Center.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Truck & Fleet Service Center spec sheet.

Width100'
Length120' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Truck & Fleet Service Center.

DAILY USEEveryday truck & fleet service center
Everyday truck & fleet service center
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a truck & fleet service center.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtruck & fleet service center + seasonal storage
truck & fleet service center + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×120 Truck & Fleet Service Center — what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4623/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×120 truck & fleet service center is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4623/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×120?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 120′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Truck & Fleet Service Center shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×120 Truck & Fleet Service Center buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×120 Truck & Fleet Service Center

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Truck & Fleet Service Center · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×121×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$54,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Truck & Fleet Service Center also viewed:

🏢 100×120

Distribution Warehouse

100×120 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×120

Manufacturing Facility

100×120 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×120

Commercial Workshop

100×120 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×120

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×120 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×120

Aircraft Hangar

100×120 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×120

Cold Storage Facility

100×120 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🎯 100×120

Indoor Riding Arena

100×120 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$219,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×120

Retail & Showroom

100×120 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏛️ 100×120

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×120 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
🌾 100×120

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×120 livestock & dairy building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →
🏢 100×120

Self-Storage Facility

100×120 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Truck & Fleet Service Center questions, answered.

How much does a 100×120 truck & fleet service center cost?

A 100×120 truck & fleet service center from Steel and Stud starts at $221,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4623/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×120 truck & fleet service center price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud truck & fleet service center ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×120 truck & fleet service center?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud truck & fleet service center different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×120 truck & fleet service center need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×120 truck & fleet service center delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×120 truck & fleet service center without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4623/month on a 100×120 truck & fleet service center.

What warranty comes with the 100×120 truck & fleet service center?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×120 truck & fleet service center in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×120 truck & fleet service center handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×120 truck & fleet service center ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request — call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Truck & Fleet Service Center quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$221,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

100×120 Truck & Fleet Service Center

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×120 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×120 Truck & Fleet Service Center | Steel and Stud — From $221,900
12
100×120 Truck & Fleet Service Center
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$252,950$221,900SAVE $31,050
or $4623/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×120Truck & Fleet Service Center
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×120 Truck & Fleet Service Center, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Fleet operators spec 100×120 for a 6-bay heavy-duty service shop with pull-through bays for tractors and 53-foot trailers. The 100-foot length fits a tractor-trailer plus tool cabinets and a parts mezzanine. Spec.

You're viewing:Truck & Fleet Service Center·Size100×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$221,900$252,950Save $31,050
or as low as $4623/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×120
100×110
smaller
$203,600
100×120
this size
$221,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Pull-Through Bays
  • 14x14 Roll-Ups
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X120-TRUCK-FLEET-SERVBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your fleet service center.

100 feet wide × 120 feet long. Drive-through lanes keep vehicles moving one direction. Fleet operators spec 100×120 for a 6-bay heavy-duty service shop with pull-through bays for tractors and 53-foot trailers.

7 maintenance baysWASH BAY + FUELING APRONParts warehouse + dispatch + crew room100′ × 120′ · 12,000 sq ft · fleet service center

7 maintenance bays · Wash bay + fueling apron · Parts warehouse + dispatch + crew room

7 maintenance bays at the front, wash bay + fueling apron in the middle, parts warehouse + dispatch + crew room at the rear. Capacity: full fleet maintenance, 7+ bays. The 100-foot length fits a tractor-trailer plus tool cabinets and a parts mezzanine.

💡 Pro tip:Drive-Through Service. Size affords: drive-through bays, overhead lube system, parts mezzanine.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×120 Truck & Fleet Service Center in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Truck & Fleet Service Center.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Truck & Fleet Service Center spec sheet.

Width100'
Length120' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Truck & Fleet Service Center.

DAILY USEEveryday truck & fleet service center
Everyday truck & fleet service center
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a truck & fleet service center.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtruck & fleet service center + seasonal storage
truck & fleet service center + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×120 Truck & Fleet Service Center — what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4623/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×120 truck & fleet service center is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4623/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×120?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 120′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Truck & Fleet Service Center shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×120 Truck & Fleet Service Center buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×120 Truck & Fleet Service Center

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Truck & Fleet Service Center · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×121×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$54,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Truck & Fleet Service Center also viewed:

🏢 100×120

Distribution Warehouse

100×120 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×120

Manufacturing Facility

100×120 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×120

Commercial Workshop

100×120 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×120

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×120 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×120

Aircraft Hangar

100×120 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×120

Cold Storage Facility

100×120 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🎯 100×120

Indoor Riding Arena

100×120 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$219,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×120

Retail & Showroom

100×120 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏛️ 100×120

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×120 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
🌾 100×120

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×120 livestock & dairy building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →
🏢 100×120

Self-Storage Facility

100×120 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Truck & Fleet Service Center questions, answered.

How much does a 100×120 truck & fleet service center cost?

A 100×120 truck & fleet service center from Steel and Stud starts at $221,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4623/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×120 truck & fleet service center price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud truck & fleet service center ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×120 truck & fleet service center?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud truck & fleet service center different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×120 truck & fleet service center need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×120 truck & fleet service center delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×120 truck & fleet service center without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4623/month on a 100×120 truck & fleet service center.

What warranty comes with the 100×120 truck & fleet service center?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×120 truck & fleet service center in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×120 truck & fleet service center handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×120 truck & fleet service center ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request — call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Truck & Fleet Service Center quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$221,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

100×120 Distribution Warehouse

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×120 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×120 Distribution Warehouse | Steel and Stud — From $221,500
12
100×120 Distribution Warehouse
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$252,500$221,500SAVE $31,000
or $4615/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×120Distribution Warehouse
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×120 Distribution Warehouse, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Logistics operators spec this footprint for regional cross-dock and last-mile distribution. The 100-foot clear span fits two 12-bay racking aisles plus a turning lane for 53-foot trailers, and 24-foot eaves give you.

You're viewing:Distribution Warehouse·Size100×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$221,500$252,500Save $31,000
or as low as $4615/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×120
100×110
smaller
$203,200
100×120
this size
$221,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 24' Eaves
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X120-DISTRIBUTION-WARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your distribution facility.

100 feet wide × 120 feet long. Column-free clear span; 18-ft+ height for 5-tier racking. Logistics operators spec this footprint for regional cross-dock and last-mile distribution.

Multi-dock loading baysHIGH-BAY RACKING AISLESOffice mezzanine + Break + Restrooms100′ × 120′ · 12,000 sq ft · distribution facility

Multi-dock loading bays · High-bay racking aisles · Office mezzanine + Break + Restrooms

Multi-dock loading bays at the front, high-bay racking aisles in the middle, office mezzanine + break + restrooms at the rear. Capacity: ~240 pallet positions, full forklift ops. The 100-foot clear span fits two 12-bay racking aisles plus a turning lane for 53-foot trailers, and 24-foot eaves give you stack height for three pallets vertically.

💡 Pro tip:Dock-Ready Layout. Size affords: multiple dock doors, mezzanine office, in-rack sprinklers.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×120 Distribution Warehouse in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Distribution Warehouse.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Distribution Warehouse spec sheet.

Width100'
Length120' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Distribution Warehouse.

DAILY USEEveryday distribution warehouse
Everyday distribution warehouse
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a distribution warehouse.
STORAGE OVERFLOWdistribution warehouse + seasonal storage
distribution warehouse + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×120 Distribution Warehouse — what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4615/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×120 distribution warehouse is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4615/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×120?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 120′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Distribution Warehouse shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×120 Distribution Warehouse buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×120 Distribution Warehouse

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Distribution Warehouse · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×121×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$54,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Distribution Warehouse also viewed:

🏭 100×120

Manufacturing Facility

100×120 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×120

Commercial Workshop

100×120 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×120

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×120 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×120

Aircraft Hangar

100×120 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×120

Cold Storage Facility

100×120 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🎯 100×120

Indoor Riding Arena

100×120 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$219,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×120

Retail & Showroom

100×120 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×120

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×120 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×120

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×120 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
🌾 100×120

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×120 livestock & dairy building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →
🏢 100×120

Self-Storage Facility

100×120 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Distribution Warehouse questions, answered.

How much does a 100×120 distribution warehouse cost?

A 100×120 distribution warehouse from Steel and Stud starts at $221,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4615/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×120 distribution warehouse price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud distribution warehouse ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×120 distribution warehouse?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud distribution warehouse different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×120 distribution warehouse need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×120 distribution warehouse delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×120 distribution warehouse without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4615/month on a 100×120 distribution warehouse.

What warranty comes with the 100×120 distribution warehouse?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×120 distribution warehouse in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×120 distribution warehouse meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Distribution Warehouse quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$221,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

100×120 Distribution Warehouse

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×120 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×120 Distribution Warehouse | Steel and Stud — From $221,500
12
100×120 Distribution Warehouse
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$252,500$221,500SAVE $31,000
or $4615/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×120Distribution Warehouse
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×120 Distribution Warehouse, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Logistics operators spec this footprint for regional cross-dock and last-mile distribution. The 100-foot clear span fits two 12-bay racking aisles plus a turning lane for 53-foot trailers, and 24-foot eaves give you.

You're viewing:Distribution Warehouse·Size100×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$221,500$252,500Save $31,000
or as low as $4615/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×120
100×110
smaller
$203,200
100×120
this size
$221,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 24' Eaves
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X120-DISTRIBUTION-WARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your distribution facility.

100 feet wide × 120 feet long. Column-free clear span; 18-ft+ height for 5-tier racking. Logistics operators spec this footprint for regional cross-dock and last-mile distribution.

Multi-dock loading baysHIGH-BAY RACKING AISLESOffice mezzanine + Break + Restrooms100′ × 120′ · 12,000 sq ft · distribution facility

Multi-dock loading bays · High-bay racking aisles · Office mezzanine + Break + Restrooms

Multi-dock loading bays at the front, high-bay racking aisles in the middle, office mezzanine + break + restrooms at the rear. Capacity: ~240 pallet positions, full forklift ops. The 100-foot clear span fits two 12-bay racking aisles plus a turning lane for 53-foot trailers, and 24-foot eaves give you stack height for three pallets vertically.

💡 Pro tip:Dock-Ready Layout. Size affords: multiple dock doors, mezzanine office, in-rack sprinklers.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×120 Distribution Warehouse in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Distribution Warehouse.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Distribution Warehouse spec sheet.

Width100'
Length120' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Distribution Warehouse.

DAILY USEEveryday distribution warehouse
Everyday distribution warehouse
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a distribution warehouse.
STORAGE OVERFLOWdistribution warehouse + seasonal storage
distribution warehouse + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×120 Distribution Warehouse — what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4615/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×120 distribution warehouse is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4615/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×120?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 120′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Distribution Warehouse shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×120 Distribution Warehouse buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×120 Distribution Warehouse

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Distribution Warehouse · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×121×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$54,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Distribution Warehouse also viewed:

🏭 100×120

Manufacturing Facility

100×120 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×120

Commercial Workshop

100×120 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×120

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×120 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×120

Aircraft Hangar

100×120 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×120

Cold Storage Facility

100×120 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🎯 100×120

Indoor Riding Arena

100×120 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$219,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×120

Retail & Showroom

100×120 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×120

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×120 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×120

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×120 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
🌾 100×120

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×120 livestock & dairy building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →
🏢 100×120

Self-Storage Facility

100×120 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Distribution Warehouse questions, answered.

How much does a 100×120 distribution warehouse cost?

A 100×120 distribution warehouse from Steel and Stud starts at $221,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4615/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×120 distribution warehouse price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud distribution warehouse ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×120 distribution warehouse?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud distribution warehouse different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×120 distribution warehouse need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×120 distribution warehouse delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×120 distribution warehouse without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4615/month on a 100×120 distribution warehouse.

What warranty comes with the 100×120 distribution warehouse?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×120 distribution warehouse in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×120 distribution warehouse meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Distribution Warehouse quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$221,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

100×120 Self-Storage Facility

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×120 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×120 Self-Storage Facility | Steel and Stud — From $221,500
12
100×120 Self-Storage Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$252,500$221,500SAVE $31,000
or $4615/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×120Self-Storage Facility
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×120 Self-Storage Facility, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Self-storage developers carve this footprint into 60-80 climate-controlled units with a central drive aisle. Pre-framed openings on 10-foot centers along both long walls let you drop interior partitions per your unit.

You're viewing:Self-Storage Facility·Size100×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$221,500$252,500Save $31,000
or as low as $4615/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×120
100×110
smaller
$203,200
100×120
this size
$221,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Pre-Framed Openings
  • Climate-Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X120-SELF-STORAGE-FACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your storage-facility layout.

100 feet wide × 120 feet long. Drive-through aisle lets tenants load out of the weather. Self-storage developers carve this footprint into 60-80 climate-controlled units with a central drive aisle.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Multiple unit rowsDrive-thru loading aisleOffice + climate wing + security100′ × 120′ · 12,000 sq ft · storage-facility layout

Multiple unit rows · Drive-thru loading aisle · Office + climate wing + security

Multiple unit rows at the front, drive-thru loading aisle in the middle, office + climate wing + security at the rear. Capacity: ~90 units incl. drive-thru access. Pre-framed openings on 10-foot centers along both long walls let you drop interior partitions per your unit mix.

💡 Pro tip:60-80 Unit Capacity. Size affords: drive-thru aisle, climate zone, office/apartment.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×120 Self-Storage Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Self-Storage Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Self-Storage Facility spec sheet.

Width100'
Length120' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Self-Storage Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday self-storage facility
Everyday self-storage facility
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a self-storage facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWself-storage facility + seasonal storage
self-storage facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×120 Self-Storage Facility — what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4615/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×120 self-storage facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4615/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×120?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 120′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Self-Storage Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×120 Self-Storage Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×120 Self-Storage Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Self-Storage Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×121×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$54,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Self-Storage Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×120

Distribution Warehouse

100×120 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×120

Manufacturing Facility

100×120 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×120

Commercial Workshop

100×120 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×120

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×120 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×120

Aircraft Hangar

100×120 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×120

Cold Storage Facility

100×120 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🎯 100×120

Indoor Riding Arena

100×120 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$219,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×120

Retail & Showroom

100×120 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×120

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×120 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×120

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×120 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
🌾 100×120

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×120 livestock & dairy building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Self-Storage Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×120 self-storage facility cost?

A 100×120 self-storage facility from Steel and Stud starts at $221,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4615/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×120 self-storage facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud self-storage facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×120 self-storage facility?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud self-storage facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×120 self-storage facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×120 self-storage facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×120 self-storage facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4615/month on a 100×120 self-storage facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×120 self-storage facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×120 self-storage facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×120 self-storage facility meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Self-Storage Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$221,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

100×120 Self-Storage Facility

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×120 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×120 Self-Storage Facility | Steel and Stud — From $221,500
12
100×120 Self-Storage Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$252,500$221,500SAVE $31,000
or $4615/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×120Self-Storage Facility
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×120 Self-Storage Facility, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Self-storage developers carve this footprint into 60-80 climate-controlled units with a central drive aisle. Pre-framed openings on 10-foot centers along both long walls let you drop interior partitions per your unit.

You're viewing:Self-Storage Facility·Size100×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$221,500$252,500Save $31,000
or as low as $4615/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×120
100×110
smaller
$203,200
100×120
this size
$221,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Pre-Framed Openings
  • Climate-Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X120-SELF-STORAGE-FACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your storage-facility layout.

100 feet wide × 120 feet long. Drive-through aisle lets tenants load out of the weather. Self-storage developers carve this footprint into 60-80 climate-controlled units with a central drive aisle.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Multiple unit rowsDrive-thru loading aisleOffice + climate wing + security100′ × 120′ · 12,000 sq ft · storage-facility layout

Multiple unit rows · Drive-thru loading aisle · Office + climate wing + security

Multiple unit rows at the front, drive-thru loading aisle in the middle, office + climate wing + security at the rear. Capacity: ~90 units incl. drive-thru access. Pre-framed openings on 10-foot centers along both long walls let you drop interior partitions per your unit mix.

💡 Pro tip:60-80 Unit Capacity. Size affords: drive-thru aisle, climate zone, office/apartment.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×120 Self-Storage Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Self-Storage Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Self-Storage Facility spec sheet.

Width100'
Length120' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Self-Storage Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday self-storage facility
Everyday self-storage facility
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a self-storage facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWself-storage facility + seasonal storage
self-storage facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×120 Self-Storage Facility — what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4615/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×120 self-storage facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4615/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×120?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 120′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Self-Storage Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×120 Self-Storage Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×120 Self-Storage Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Self-Storage Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×121×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$54,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Self-Storage Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×120

Distribution Warehouse

100×120 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×120

Manufacturing Facility

100×120 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×120

Commercial Workshop

100×120 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×120

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×120 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×120

Aircraft Hangar

100×120 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×120

Cold Storage Facility

100×120 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🎯 100×120

Indoor Riding Arena

100×120 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$219,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×120

Retail & Showroom

100×120 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×120

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×120 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×120

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×120 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
🌾 100×120

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×120 livestock & dairy building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Self-Storage Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×120 self-storage facility cost?

A 100×120 self-storage facility from Steel and Stud starts at $221,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4615/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×120 self-storage facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud self-storage facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×120 self-storage facility?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud self-storage facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×120 self-storage facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×120 self-storage facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×120 self-storage facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4615/month on a 100×120 self-storage facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×120 self-storage facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×120 self-storage facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×120 self-storage facility meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Self-Storage Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$221,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

100×120 Sports & Recreation Facility

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×120 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×120 Sports & Recreation Facility | Steel and Stud — From $221,600
12
100×120 Sports & Recreation Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$252,600$221,600SAVE $31,000
or $4617/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×120Sports & Recreation Facility
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×120 Sports & Recreation Facility, engineered to code for assembly use.

Schools and parks departments build indoor practice facilities, batting cages, or pickleball courts at this footprint. 12,000 sq ft fits four full pickleball courts plus spectator seating, or a regulation basketball.

You're viewing:Sports & Recreation Facility·Size100×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$221,600$252,600Save $31,000
or as low as $4617/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×120
100×110
smaller
$203,300
100×120
this size
$221,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • 24' Eaves
  • Skylights
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X120-SPORTS-RECREATIOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your indoor sports complex.

100 feet wide × 120 feet long. Column-free at full width for tournament layouts. Schools and parks departments build indoor practice facilities, batting cages, or pickleball courts at this footprint.

6-court gridTURF / MULTI-SPORT ZONELobby + lockers + mezzanine viewing100′ × 120′ · 12,000 sq ft · indoor sports complex

6-court grid · Turf / multi-sport zone · Lobby + lockers + mezzanine viewing

6-court grid at the front, turf / multi-sport zone in the middle, lobby + lockers + mezzanine viewing at the rear. Capacity: 6 courts + turf training zone. 12,000 sq ft fits four full pickleball courts plus spectator seating, or a regulation basketball half-court with a turf practice area.

💡 Pro tip:Court-Height Clearance. Size affords: mezzanine viewing, locker rooms, pro shop.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×120 Sports & Recreation Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Sports & Recreation Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Sports & Recreation Facility spec sheet.

Width100'
Length120' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Sports & Recreation Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday sports & recreation facility
Everyday sports & recreation facility
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a sports & recreation facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsports & recreation facility + seasonal storage
sports & recreation facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×120 Sports & Recreation Facility — what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4617/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×120 sports & recreation facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4617/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×120?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 120′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Sports & Recreation Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×120 Sports & Recreation Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×120 Sports & Recreation Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Sports & Recreation Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×121×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$54,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Sports & Recreation Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×120

Distribution Warehouse

100×120 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×120

Manufacturing Facility

100×120 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×120

Commercial Workshop

100×120 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×120

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×120 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×120

Aircraft Hangar

100×120 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×120

Cold Storage Facility

100×120 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🎯 100×120

Indoor Riding Arena

100×120 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$219,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×120

Retail & Showroom

100×120 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×120

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×120 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🌾 100×120

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×120 livestock & dairy building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →
🏢 100×120

Self-Storage Facility

100×120 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Sports & Recreation Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×120 sports & recreation facility cost?

A 100×120 sports & recreation facility from Steel and Stud starts at $221,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4617/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×120 sports & recreation facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud sports & recreation facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×120 sports & recreation facility?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud sports & recreation facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×120 sports & recreation facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×120 sports & recreation facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×120 sports & recreation facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4617/month on a 100×120 sports & recreation facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×120 sports & recreation facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×120 sports & recreation facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×120 sports & recreation facility pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud's engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Sports & Recreation Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$221,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

100×120 Sports & Recreation Facility

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×120 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×120 Sports & Recreation Facility | Steel and Stud — From $221,600
12
100×120 Sports & Recreation Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$252,600$221,600SAVE $31,000
or $4617/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×120Sports & Recreation Facility
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×120 Sports & Recreation Facility, engineered to code for assembly use.

Schools and parks departments build indoor practice facilities, batting cages, or pickleball courts at this footprint. 12,000 sq ft fits four full pickleball courts plus spectator seating, or a regulation basketball.

You're viewing:Sports & Recreation Facility·Size100×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$221,600$252,600Save $31,000
or as low as $4617/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×120
100×110
smaller
$203,300
100×120
this size
$221,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • 24' Eaves
  • Skylights
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X120-SPORTS-RECREATIOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your indoor sports complex.

100 feet wide × 120 feet long. Column-free at full width for tournament layouts. Schools and parks departments build indoor practice facilities, batting cages, or pickleball courts at this footprint.

6-court gridTURF / MULTI-SPORT ZONELobby + lockers + mezzanine viewing100′ × 120′ · 12,000 sq ft · indoor sports complex

6-court grid · Turf / multi-sport zone · Lobby + lockers + mezzanine viewing

6-court grid at the front, turf / multi-sport zone in the middle, lobby + lockers + mezzanine viewing at the rear. Capacity: 6 courts + turf training zone. 12,000 sq ft fits four full pickleball courts plus spectator seating, or a regulation basketball half-court with a turf practice area.

💡 Pro tip:Court-Height Clearance. Size affords: mezzanine viewing, locker rooms, pro shop.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×120 Sports & Recreation Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Sports & Recreation Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Sports & Recreation Facility spec sheet.

Width100'
Length120' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Sports & Recreation Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday sports & recreation facility
Everyday sports & recreation facility
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a sports & recreation facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsports & recreation facility + seasonal storage
sports & recreation facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×120 Sports & Recreation Facility — what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4617/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×120 sports & recreation facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4617/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×120?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 120′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Sports & Recreation Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×120 Sports & Recreation Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×120 Sports & Recreation Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Sports & Recreation Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×121×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$54,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Sports & Recreation Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×120

Distribution Warehouse

100×120 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×120

Manufacturing Facility

100×120 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×120

Commercial Workshop

100×120 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×120

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×120 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×120

Aircraft Hangar

100×120 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×120

Cold Storage Facility

100×120 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🎯 100×120

Indoor Riding Arena

100×120 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$219,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×120

Retail & Showroom

100×120 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×120

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×120 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🌾 100×120

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×120 livestock & dairy building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →
🏢 100×120

Self-Storage Facility

100×120 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Sports & Recreation Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×120 sports & recreation facility cost?

A 100×120 sports & recreation facility from Steel and Stud starts at $221,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4617/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×120 sports & recreation facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud sports & recreation facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×120 sports & recreation facility?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud sports & recreation facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×120 sports & recreation facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×120 sports & recreation facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×120 sports & recreation facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4617/month on a 100×120 sports & recreation facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×120 sports & recreation facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×120 sports & recreation facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×120 sports & recreation facility pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud's engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Sports & Recreation Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$221,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

100×120 Retail & Showroom

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×120 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×120 Retail & Showroom | Steel and Stud — From $221,500
12
100×120 Retail & Showroom
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$252,500$221,500SAVE $31,000
or $4615/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×120Retail & Showroom
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×120 Retail & Showroom, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Commercial real estate buyers building auto, RV, or boat showrooms use this size to display 30+ vehicles with a customer lounge and service write-up area. Storefront glazing across one long wall, two 100×120 roll-ups.

You're viewing:Retail & Showroom·Size100×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$221,500$252,500Save $31,000
or as low as $4615/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×120
100×110
smaller
$203,200
100×120
this size
$221,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Storefront Glass
  • Wainscoting
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X120-RETAIL-SHOWROOMBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your big-box showroom.

100 feet wide × 120 feet long. Engineered storefront glazing + side loading dock. Commercial real estate buyers building auto, RV, or boat showrooms use this size to display 30+ vehicles with a customer lounge and service write-up area.

Full-glass storefrontShowroom + Demo floorSTOCKROOM + RECEIVING + OFFICE100′ × 120′ · 12,000 sq ft · big-box showroom

Full-glass storefront · Showroom + Demo floor · Stockroom + Receiving + Office

Full-glass storefront at the front, showroom + demo floor in the middle, stockroom + receiving + office at the rear. Capacity: ~7200 sf showroom, 3600 sf stock. Storefront glazing across one long wall, two 100×120 roll-ups for vehicle moves, and wainscoting on the lower 4 feet give it curb appeal.

💡 Pro tip:Showroom Curb Appeal. Size affords: mezzanine office, loading dock, multiple POS stations.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×120 Retail & Showroom in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Retail & Showroom.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Retail & Showroom spec sheet.

Width100'
Length120' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Retail & Showroom.

DAILY USEEveryday retail & showroom
Everyday retail & showroom
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a retail & showroom.
STORAGE OVERFLOWretail & showroom + seasonal storage
retail & showroom + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×120 Retail & Showroom — what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4615/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×120 retail & showroom is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4615/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×120?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 120′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Retail & Showroom shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×120 Retail & Showroom buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×120 Retail & Showroom

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Retail & Showroom · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×121×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$54,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Retail & Showroom also viewed:

🏢 100×120

Distribution Warehouse

100×120 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×120

Manufacturing Facility

100×120 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×120

Commercial Workshop

100×120 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×120

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×120 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×120

Aircraft Hangar

100×120 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×120

Cold Storage Facility

100×120 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🎯 100×120

Indoor Riding Arena

100×120 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$219,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏭 100×120

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×120 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×120

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×120 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
🌾 100×120

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×120 livestock & dairy building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →
🏢 100×120

Self-Storage Facility

100×120 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Retail & Showroom questions, answered.

How much does a 100×120 retail & showroom cost?

A 100×120 retail & showroom from Steel and Stud starts at $221,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4615/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×120 retail & showroom price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud retail & showroom ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×120 retail & showroom?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud retail & showroom different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×120 retail & showroom need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×120 retail & showroom delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×120 retail & showroom without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4615/month on a 100×120 retail & showroom.

What warranty comes with the 100×120 retail & showroom?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×120 retail & showroom in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×120 retail & showroom meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Retail & Showroom quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$221,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

100×120 Retail & Showroom

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×120 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×120 Retail & Showroom | Steel and Stud — From $221,500
12
100×120 Retail & Showroom
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$252,500$221,500SAVE $31,000
or $4615/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×120Retail & Showroom
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×120 Retail & Showroom, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Commercial real estate buyers building auto, RV, or boat showrooms use this size to display 30+ vehicles with a customer lounge and service write-up area. Storefront glazing across one long wall, two 100×120 roll-ups.

You're viewing:Retail & Showroom·Size100×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$221,500$252,500Save $31,000
or as low as $4615/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×120
100×110
smaller
$203,200
100×120
this size
$221,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Storefront Glass
  • Wainscoting
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X120-RETAIL-SHOWROOMBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your big-box showroom.

100 feet wide × 120 feet long. Engineered storefront glazing + side loading dock. Commercial real estate buyers building auto, RV, or boat showrooms use this size to display 30+ vehicles with a customer lounge and service write-up area.

Full-glass storefrontShowroom + Demo floorSTOCKROOM + RECEIVING + OFFICE100′ × 120′ · 12,000 sq ft · big-box showroom

Full-glass storefront · Showroom + Demo floor · Stockroom + Receiving + Office

Full-glass storefront at the front, showroom + demo floor in the middle, stockroom + receiving + office at the rear. Capacity: ~7200 sf showroom, 3600 sf stock. Storefront glazing across one long wall, two 100×120 roll-ups for vehicle moves, and wainscoting on the lower 4 feet give it curb appeal.

💡 Pro tip:Showroom Curb Appeal. Size affords: mezzanine office, loading dock, multiple POS stations.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×120 Retail & Showroom in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Retail & Showroom.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Retail & Showroom spec sheet.

Width100'
Length120' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Retail & Showroom.

DAILY USEEveryday retail & showroom
Everyday retail & showroom
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a retail & showroom.
STORAGE OVERFLOWretail & showroom + seasonal storage
retail & showroom + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×120 Retail & Showroom — what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4615/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×120 retail & showroom is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4615/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×120?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 120′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Retail & Showroom shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×120 Retail & Showroom buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×120 Retail & Showroom

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Retail & Showroom · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×121×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$54,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Retail & Showroom also viewed:

🏢 100×120

Distribution Warehouse

100×120 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×120

Manufacturing Facility

100×120 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×120

Commercial Workshop

100×120 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×120

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×120 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×120

Aircraft Hangar

100×120 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×120

Cold Storage Facility

100×120 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🎯 100×120

Indoor Riding Arena

100×120 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$219,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏭 100×120

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×120 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×120

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×120 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
🌾 100×120

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×120 livestock & dairy building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →
🏢 100×120

Self-Storage Facility

100×120 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Retail & Showroom questions, answered.

How much does a 100×120 retail & showroom cost?

A 100×120 retail & showroom from Steel and Stud starts at $221,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4615/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×120 retail & showroom price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud retail & showroom ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×120 retail & showroom?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud retail & showroom different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×120 retail & showroom need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×120 retail & showroom delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×120 retail & showroom without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4615/month on a 100×120 retail & showroom.

What warranty comes with the 100×120 retail & showroom?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×120 retail & showroom in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×120 retail & showroom meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Retail & Showroom quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$221,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

100×150 Aircraft Hangar

15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×150 Aircraft Hangar | Steel and Stud — From $240,550
12
100×150 Aircraft Hangar
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$274,250$240,550SAVE $33,700
or $5011/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×150Aircraft Hangar
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×150 Aircraft Hangar, engineered for code-compliant business use.

100×150 delivers 15000 sq ft of code-compliant aircraft hangar space. Private operators hangar light twins, turboprops, and small jets in this footprint. The 100-foot opening accommodates a King Air or Citation.

You're viewing:Aircraft Hangar·Size100×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$240,550$274,250Save $33,700
or as low as $5011/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×150
100×120
smaller
$221,500
100×150
this size
$240,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 15,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Bifold Door
  • 24' Eaves
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X150-AIRCRAFT-HANGARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-aircraft hangar.

100 feet wide × 150 feet long. Engineered for column-free clear span at 100ft width. 100×150 delivers 15000 sq ft of code-compliant aircraft hangar space.

Multi-aircraft floorMaintenance / engine zoneOffice + parts + pilot lounge100′ × 150′ · 15,000 sq ft · multi-aircraft hangar

Multi-aircraft floor · Maintenance / engine zone · Office + parts + pilot lounge

Multi-aircraft floor at the front, maintenance / engine zone in the middle, office + parts + pilot lounge at the rear. Capacity: 2-4 aircraft, full FBO operations. Private operators hangar light twins, turboprops, and small jets in this footprint.

💡 Pro tip:FAA-Ready Drawings. Size affords: overhead crane, office mezzanine, parts storage cage.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×150 Aircraft Hangar in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Aircraft Hangar.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
15,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Aircraft Hangar spec sheet.

Width100'
Length150' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space15,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Aircraft Hangar.

DAILY USEEveryday aircraft hangar
Everyday aircraft hangar
15,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a aircraft hangar.
STORAGE OVERFLOWaircraft hangar + seasonal storage
aircraft hangar + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×150 Aircraft Hangar — what makes it different.

15,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$5011/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×150 aircraft hangar is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $5011/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×150?

15,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 150′ footprint with 15,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $120,000–$180,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Aircraft Hangar shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×150 Aircraft Hangar buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×150 Aircraft Hangar

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Aircraft Hangar · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$67,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Aircraft Hangar also viewed:

🏢 100×150

Distribution Warehouse

100×150 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×150

Manufacturing Facility

100×150 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×150

Commercial Workshop

100×150 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×150

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×150 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏭 100×150

Cold Storage Facility

100×150 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🌾 100×150

Indoor Riding Arena

100×150 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×150

Retail & Showroom

100×150 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×150

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×150 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×150

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×150 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Aircraft Hangar questions, answered.

How much does a 100×150 aircraft hangar cost?

A 100×150 aircraft hangar from Steel and Stud starts at $240,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $5011/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×150 aircraft hangar price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud aircraft hangar ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×150 aircraft hangar?

Almost always for 15,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud aircraft hangar different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×150 aircraft hangar need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×150 aircraft hangar delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×150 aircraft hangar without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $5011/month on a 100×150 aircraft hangar.

What warranty comes with the 100×150 aircraft hangar?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×150 aircraft hangar in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×150 aircraft hangar meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Aircraft Hangar quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$240,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

100×150 Aircraft Hangar

15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×150 Aircraft Hangar | Steel and Stud — From $240,550
12
100×150 Aircraft Hangar
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$274,250$240,550SAVE $33,700
or $5011/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×150Aircraft Hangar
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×150 Aircraft Hangar, engineered for code-compliant business use.

100×150 delivers 15000 sq ft of code-compliant aircraft hangar space. Private operators hangar light twins, turboprops, and small jets in this footprint. The 100-foot opening accommodates a King Air or Citation.

You're viewing:Aircraft Hangar·Size100×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$240,550$274,250Save $33,700
or as low as $5011/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×150
100×120
smaller
$221,500
100×150
this size
$240,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 15,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Bifold Door
  • 24' Eaves
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X150-AIRCRAFT-HANGARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-aircraft hangar.

100 feet wide × 150 feet long. Engineered for column-free clear span at 100ft width. 100×150 delivers 15000 sq ft of code-compliant aircraft hangar space.

Multi-aircraft floorMaintenance / engine zoneOffice + parts + pilot lounge100′ × 150′ · 15,000 sq ft · multi-aircraft hangar

Multi-aircraft floor · Maintenance / engine zone · Office + parts + pilot lounge

Multi-aircraft floor at the front, maintenance / engine zone in the middle, office + parts + pilot lounge at the rear. Capacity: 2-4 aircraft, full FBO operations. Private operators hangar light twins, turboprops, and small jets in this footprint.

💡 Pro tip:FAA-Ready Drawings. Size affords: overhead crane, office mezzanine, parts storage cage.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×150 Aircraft Hangar in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Aircraft Hangar.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
15,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Aircraft Hangar spec sheet.

Width100'
Length150' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space15,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Aircraft Hangar.

DAILY USEEveryday aircraft hangar
Everyday aircraft hangar
15,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a aircraft hangar.
STORAGE OVERFLOWaircraft hangar + seasonal storage
aircraft hangar + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×150 Aircraft Hangar — what makes it different.

15,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$5011/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×150 aircraft hangar is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $5011/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×150?

15,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 150′ footprint with 15,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $120,000–$180,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Aircraft Hangar shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×150 Aircraft Hangar buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×150 Aircraft Hangar

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Aircraft Hangar · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$67,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Aircraft Hangar also viewed:

🏢 100×150

Distribution Warehouse

100×150 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×150

Manufacturing Facility

100×150 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×150

Commercial Workshop

100×150 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×150

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×150 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏭 100×150

Cold Storage Facility

100×150 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🌾 100×150

Indoor Riding Arena

100×150 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×150

Retail & Showroom

100×150 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×150

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×150 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×150

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×150 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Aircraft Hangar questions, answered.

How much does a 100×150 aircraft hangar cost?

A 100×150 aircraft hangar from Steel and Stud starts at $240,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $5011/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×150 aircraft hangar price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud aircraft hangar ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×150 aircraft hangar?

Almost always for 15,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud aircraft hangar different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×150 aircraft hangar need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×150 aircraft hangar delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×150 aircraft hangar without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $5011/month on a 100×150 aircraft hangar.

What warranty comes with the 100×150 aircraft hangar?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×150 aircraft hangar in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×150 aircraft hangar meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Aircraft Hangar quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$240,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

100×150 Commercial Workshop

15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×150 Commercial Workshop | Steel and Stud — From $240,550
12
100×150 Commercial Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$274,250$240,550SAVE $33,700
or $5011/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×150Commercial Workshop
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×150 Commercial Workshop, engineered for code-compliant business use.

100×150 delivers 15000 sq ft of code-compliant commercial workshop space. Multi-tenant commercial real estate developers split this footprint into four 100×150 bays, each with its own roll-up and walk-in door. It's a.

You're viewing:Commercial Workshop·Size100×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$240,550$274,250Save $33,700
or as low as $5011/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×150
100×120
smaller
$221,500
100×150
this size
$240,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 15,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • 4-Bay Layout
  • Pre-Framed Openings
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X150-COMMERCIAL-WORKSBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-station shop.

100 feet wide × 150 feet long. Separates dusty + clean operations. 100×150 delivers 15000 sq ft of code-compliant commercial workshop space.

Wood + metal benchesCNC / TABLE-SAW CENTERFinishing room + Material storage100′ × 150′ · 15,000 sq ft · multi-station shop

Wood + metal benches · CNC / table-saw center · Finishing room + Material storage

Wood + metal benches at the front, cnc / table-saw center in the middle, finishing room + material storage at the rear. Capacity: multi-craft shop / small business. Multi-tenant commercial real estate developers split this footprint into four 100×150 bays, each with its own roll-up and walk-in door.

💡 Pro tip:Multi-Tenant Ready. Size affords: CNC table, paint booth, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×150 Commercial Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Commercial Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
15,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Commercial Workshop spec sheet.

Width100'
Length150' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space15,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Commercial Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday commercial workshop
Everyday commercial workshop
15,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a commercial workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommercial workshop + seasonal storage
commercial workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×150 Commercial Workshop — what makes it different.

15,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$5011/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×150 commercial workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $5011/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×150?

15,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 150′ footprint with 15,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $120,000–$180,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Commercial Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×150 Commercial Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×150 Commercial Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Commercial Workshop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$67,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Commercial Workshop also viewed:

🏢 100×150

Distribution Warehouse

100×150 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×150

Manufacturing Facility

100×150 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🌾 100×150

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×150 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×150

Aircraft Hangar

100×150 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×150

Cold Storage Facility

100×150 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🌾 100×150

Indoor Riding Arena

100×150 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×150

Retail & Showroom

100×150 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×150

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×150 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×150

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×150 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Commercial Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 100×150 commercial workshop cost?

A 100×150 commercial workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $240,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $5011/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×150 commercial workshop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud commercial workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×150 commercial workshop?

Almost always for 15,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud commercial workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×150 commercial workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×150 commercial workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×150 commercial workshop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $5011/month on a 100×150 commercial workshop.

What warranty comes with the 100×150 commercial workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×150 commercial workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×150 commercial workshop meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Commercial Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$240,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

100×150 Commercial Workshop

15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×150 Commercial Workshop | Steel and Stud — From $240,550
12
100×150 Commercial Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$274,250$240,550SAVE $33,700
or $5011/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×150Commercial Workshop
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×150 Commercial Workshop, engineered for code-compliant business use.

100×150 delivers 15000 sq ft of code-compliant commercial workshop space. Multi-tenant commercial real estate developers split this footprint into four 100×150 bays, each with its own roll-up and walk-in door. It's a.

You're viewing:Commercial Workshop·Size100×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$240,550$274,250Save $33,700
or as low as $5011/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×150
100×120
smaller
$221,500
100×150
this size
$240,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 15,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • 4-Bay Layout
  • Pre-Framed Openings
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X150-COMMERCIAL-WORKSBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-station shop.

100 feet wide × 150 feet long. Separates dusty + clean operations. 100×150 delivers 15000 sq ft of code-compliant commercial workshop space.

Wood + metal benchesCNC / TABLE-SAW CENTERFinishing room + Material storage100′ × 150′ · 15,000 sq ft · multi-station shop

Wood + metal benches · CNC / table-saw center · Finishing room + Material storage

Wood + metal benches at the front, cnc / table-saw center in the middle, finishing room + material storage at the rear. Capacity: multi-craft shop / small business. Multi-tenant commercial real estate developers split this footprint into four 100×150 bays, each with its own roll-up and walk-in door.

💡 Pro tip:Multi-Tenant Ready. Size affords: CNC table, paint booth, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×150 Commercial Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Commercial Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
15,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Commercial Workshop spec sheet.

Width100'
Length150' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space15,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Commercial Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday commercial workshop
Everyday commercial workshop
15,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a commercial workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommercial workshop + seasonal storage
commercial workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×150 Commercial Workshop — what makes it different.

15,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$5011/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×150 commercial workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $5011/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×150?

15,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 150′ footprint with 15,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $120,000–$180,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Commercial Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×150 Commercial Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×150 Commercial Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Commercial Workshop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$67,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Commercial Workshop also viewed:

🏢 100×150

Distribution Warehouse

100×150 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×150

Manufacturing Facility

100×150 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🌾 100×150

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×150 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×150

Aircraft Hangar

100×150 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×150

Cold Storage Facility

100×150 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🌾 100×150

Indoor Riding Arena

100×150 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×150

Retail & Showroom

100×150 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×150

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×150 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×150

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×150 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Commercial Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 100×150 commercial workshop cost?

A 100×150 commercial workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $240,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $5011/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×150 commercial workshop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud commercial workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×150 commercial workshop?

Almost always for 15,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud commercial workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×150 commercial workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×150 commercial workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×150 commercial workshop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $5011/month on a 100×150 commercial workshop.

What warranty comes with the 100×150 commercial workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×150 commercial workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×150 commercial workshop meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Commercial Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$240,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

100×150 Truck & Fleet Service Center

15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×150 Truck & Fleet Service Center | Steel and Stud — From $240,950
12
100×150 Truck & Fleet Service Center
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$274,700$240,950SAVE $33,750
or $5020/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×150Truck & Fleet Service Center
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×150 Truck & Fleet Service Center, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

100×150 delivers 15000 sq ft of heavy-duty truck & fleet service center space. Fleet operators spec 100×150 for a 6-bay heavy-duty service shop with pull-through bays for tractors and 53-foot trailers. The 100-foot.

You're viewing:Truck & Fleet Service Center·Size100×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$240,950$274,700Save $33,750
or as low as $5020/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×150
100×120
smaller
$221,900
100×150
this size
$240,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 15,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Pull-Through Bays
  • 14x14 Roll-Ups
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X150-TRUCK-FLEET-SERVBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your fleet service center.

100 feet wide × 150 feet long. Drive-through lanes keep vehicles moving one direction. 100×150 delivers 15000 sq ft of heavy-duty truck & fleet service center space.

7 maintenance baysWASH BAY + FUELING APRONParts warehouse + dispatch + crew room100′ × 150′ · 15,000 sq ft · fleet service center

7 maintenance bays · Wash bay + fueling apron · Parts warehouse + dispatch + crew room

7 maintenance bays at the front, wash bay + fueling apron in the middle, parts warehouse + dispatch + crew room at the rear. Capacity: full fleet maintenance, 7+ bays. Fleet operators spec 100×150 for a 6-bay heavy-duty service shop with pull-through bays for tractors and 53-foot trailers.

💡 Pro tip:Drive-Through Service. Size affords: drive-through bays, overhead lube system, parts mezzanine.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×150 Truck & Fleet Service Center in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Truck & Fleet Service Center.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
15,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Truck & Fleet Service Center spec sheet.

Width100'
Length150' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space15,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Truck & Fleet Service Center.

DAILY USEEveryday truck & fleet service center
Everyday truck & fleet service center
15,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a truck & fleet service center.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtruck & fleet service center + seasonal storage
truck & fleet service center + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×150 Truck & Fleet Service Center — what makes it different.

15,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$5020/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×150 truck & fleet service center is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $5020/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×150?

15,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 150′ footprint with 15,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $120,000–$180,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Truck & Fleet Service Center shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×150 Truck & Fleet Service Center buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×150 Truck & Fleet Service Center

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Truck & Fleet Service Center · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$67,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Truck & Fleet Service Center also viewed:

🏢 100×150

Distribution Warehouse

100×150 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×150

Manufacturing Facility

100×150 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×150

Commercial Workshop

100×150 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×150

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×150 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×150

Aircraft Hangar

100×150 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×150

Cold Storage Facility

100×150 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🌾 100×150

Indoor Riding Arena

100×150 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×150

Retail & Showroom

100×150 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏛️ 100×150

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×150 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Truck & Fleet Service Center questions, answered.

How much does a 100×150 truck & fleet service center cost?

A 100×150 truck & fleet service center from Steel and Stud starts at $240,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $5020/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×150 truck & fleet service center price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud truck & fleet service center ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×150 truck & fleet service center?

Almost always for 15,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud truck & fleet service center different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×150 truck & fleet service center need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×150 truck & fleet service center delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×150 truck & fleet service center without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $5020/month on a 100×150 truck & fleet service center.

What warranty comes with the 100×150 truck & fleet service center?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×150 truck & fleet service center in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×150 truck & fleet service center handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×150 truck & fleet service center ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request — call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Truck & Fleet Service Center quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$240,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

100×150 Truck & Fleet Service Center

15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×150 Truck & Fleet Service Center | Steel and Stud — From $240,950
12
100×150 Truck & Fleet Service Center
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$274,700$240,950SAVE $33,750
or $5020/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×150Truck & Fleet Service Center
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×150 Truck & Fleet Service Center, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

100×150 delivers 15000 sq ft of heavy-duty truck & fleet service center space. Fleet operators spec 100×150 for a 6-bay heavy-duty service shop with pull-through bays for tractors and 53-foot trailers. The 100-foot.

You're viewing:Truck & Fleet Service Center·Size100×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$240,950$274,700Save $33,750
or as low as $5020/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×150
100×120
smaller
$221,900
100×150
this size
$240,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 15,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Pull-Through Bays
  • 14x14 Roll-Ups
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X150-TRUCK-FLEET-SERVBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your fleet service center.

100 feet wide × 150 feet long. Drive-through lanes keep vehicles moving one direction. 100×150 delivers 15000 sq ft of heavy-duty truck & fleet service center space.

7 maintenance baysWASH BAY + FUELING APRONParts warehouse + dispatch + crew room100′ × 150′ · 15,000 sq ft · fleet service center

7 maintenance bays · Wash bay + fueling apron · Parts warehouse + dispatch + crew room

7 maintenance bays at the front, wash bay + fueling apron in the middle, parts warehouse + dispatch + crew room at the rear. Capacity: full fleet maintenance, 7+ bays. Fleet operators spec 100×150 for a 6-bay heavy-duty service shop with pull-through bays for tractors and 53-foot trailers.

💡 Pro tip:Drive-Through Service. Size affords: drive-through bays, overhead lube system, parts mezzanine.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×150 Truck & Fleet Service Center in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Truck & Fleet Service Center.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
15,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Truck & Fleet Service Center spec sheet.

Width100'
Length150' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space15,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Truck & Fleet Service Center.

DAILY USEEveryday truck & fleet service center
Everyday truck & fleet service center
15,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a truck & fleet service center.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtruck & fleet service center + seasonal storage
truck & fleet service center + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×150 Truck & Fleet Service Center — what makes it different.

15,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$5020/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×150 truck & fleet service center is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $5020/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×150?

15,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 150′ footprint with 15,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $120,000–$180,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Truck & Fleet Service Center shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×150 Truck & Fleet Service Center buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×150 Truck & Fleet Service Center

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Truck & Fleet Service Center · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$67,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Truck & Fleet Service Center also viewed:

🏢 100×150

Distribution Warehouse

100×150 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×150

Manufacturing Facility

100×150 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×150

Commercial Workshop

100×150 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×150

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×150 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×150

Aircraft Hangar

100×150 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×150

Cold Storage Facility

100×150 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🌾 100×150

Indoor Riding Arena

100×150 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×150

Retail & Showroom

100×150 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏛️ 100×150

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×150 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Truck & Fleet Service Center questions, answered.

How much does a 100×150 truck & fleet service center cost?

A 100×150 truck & fleet service center from Steel and Stud starts at $240,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $5020/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×150 truck & fleet service center price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud truck & fleet service center ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×150 truck & fleet service center?

Almost always for 15,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud truck & fleet service center different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×150 truck & fleet service center need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×150 truck & fleet service center delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×150 truck & fleet service center without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $5020/month on a 100×150 truck & fleet service center.

What warranty comes with the 100×150 truck & fleet service center?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×150 truck & fleet service center in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×150 truck & fleet service center handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×150 truck & fleet service center ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request — call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Truck & Fleet Service Center quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$240,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

100×150 Cold Storage Facility

15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×150 Cold Storage Facility | Steel and Stud — From $240,950
12
100×150 Cold Storage Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$274,700$240,950SAVE $33,750
or $5020/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×150Cold Storage Facility
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×150 Cold Storage Facility, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 100×150 cold storage facility packs 15000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Food distributors and produce operators spec insulated metal panels (IMPs).

You're viewing:Cold Storage Facility·Size100×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$240,950$274,700Save $33,750
or as low as $5020/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×150
100×120
smaller
$221,900
100×150
this size
$240,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 15,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • IMP Walls
  • Vapor-Sealed
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X150-COLD-STORAGE-FACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your cold-storage facility.

100 feet wide × 150 feet long. 16-ft clear height for racked cold storage. Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 100×150 cold storage facility packs 15000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Freezer + cooler baysStaging / breakroom + compressor roomDock-height loading100′ × 150′ · 15,000 sq ft · cold-storage facility

Freezer + cooler bays · Staging / breakroom + compressor room · Dock-height loading

Freezer + cooler bays at the front, staging / breakroom + compressor room in the middle, dock-height loading at the rear. Capacity: ~250 pallet positions across temp zones. Food distributors and produce operators spec insulated metal panels (IMPs) on this footprint for refrigerated and freezer storage.

💡 Pro tip:Refrigeration-Ready. Size affords: multiple temp zones, dock levelers, glycol/ammonia pad.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×150 Cold Storage Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Cold Storage Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
15,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Cold Storage Facility spec sheet.

Width100'
Length150' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space15,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Cold Storage Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday cold storage facility
Everyday cold storage facility
15,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a cold storage facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcold storage facility + seasonal storage
cold storage facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×150 Cold Storage Facility — what makes it different.

15,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$5020/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×150 cold storage facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $5020/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×150?

15,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 150′ footprint with 15,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $120,000–$180,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Cold Storage Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×150 Cold Storage Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×150 Cold Storage Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Cold Storage Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$67,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Cold Storage Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×150

Distribution Warehouse

100×150 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×150

Manufacturing Facility

100×150 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×150

Commercial Workshop

100×150 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×150

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×150 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×150

Aircraft Hangar

100×150 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🌾 100×150

Indoor Riding Arena

100×150 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×150

Retail & Showroom

100×150 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×150

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×150 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×150

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×150 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Cold Storage Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×150 cold storage facility cost?

A 100×150 cold storage facility from Steel and Stud starts at $240,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $5020/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×150 cold storage facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud cold storage facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×150 cold storage facility?

Almost always for 15,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud cold storage facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×150 cold storage facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×150 cold storage facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×150 cold storage facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $5020/month on a 100×150 cold storage facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×150 cold storage facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×150 cold storage facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×150 cold storage facility handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×150 cold storage facility ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request — call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Cold Storage Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$240,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

100×150 Cold Storage Facility

15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×150 Cold Storage Facility | Steel and Stud — From $240,950
12
100×150 Cold Storage Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$274,700$240,950SAVE $33,750
or $5020/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×150Cold Storage Facility
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×150 Cold Storage Facility, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 100×150 cold storage facility packs 15000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Food distributors and produce operators spec insulated metal panels (IMPs).

You're viewing:Cold Storage Facility·Size100×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$240,950$274,700Save $33,750
or as low as $5020/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×150
100×120
smaller
$221,900
100×150
this size
$240,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 15,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • IMP Walls
  • Vapor-Sealed
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X150-COLD-STORAGE-FACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your cold-storage facility.

100 feet wide × 150 feet long. 16-ft clear height for racked cold storage. Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 100×150 cold storage facility packs 15000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Freezer + cooler baysStaging / breakroom + compressor roomDock-height loading100′ × 150′ · 15,000 sq ft · cold-storage facility

Freezer + cooler bays · Staging / breakroom + compressor room · Dock-height loading

Freezer + cooler bays at the front, staging / breakroom + compressor room in the middle, dock-height loading at the rear. Capacity: ~250 pallet positions across temp zones. Food distributors and produce operators spec insulated metal panels (IMPs) on this footprint for refrigerated and freezer storage.

💡 Pro tip:Refrigeration-Ready. Size affords: multiple temp zones, dock levelers, glycol/ammonia pad.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×150 Cold Storage Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Cold Storage Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
15,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Cold Storage Facility spec sheet.

Width100'
Length150' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space15,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Cold Storage Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday cold storage facility
Everyday cold storage facility
15,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a cold storage facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcold storage facility + seasonal storage
cold storage facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×150 Cold Storage Facility — what makes it different.

15,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$5020/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×150 cold storage facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $5020/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×150?

15,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 150′ footprint with 15,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $120,000–$180,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Cold Storage Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×150 Cold Storage Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×150 Cold Storage Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Cold Storage Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$67,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Cold Storage Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×150

Distribution Warehouse

100×150 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×150

Manufacturing Facility

100×150 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×150

Commercial Workshop

100×150 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×150

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×150 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×150

Aircraft Hangar

100×150 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🌾 100×150

Indoor Riding Arena

100×150 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×150

Retail & Showroom

100×150 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×150

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×150 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×150

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×150 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Cold Storage Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×150 cold storage facility cost?

A 100×150 cold storage facility from Steel and Stud starts at $240,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $5020/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×150 cold storage facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud cold storage facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×150 cold storage facility?

Almost always for 15,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud cold storage facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×150 cold storage facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×150 cold storage facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×150 cold storage facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $5020/month on a 100×150 cold storage facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×150 cold storage facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×150 cold storage facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×150 cold storage facility handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×150 cold storage facility ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request — call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Cold Storage Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$240,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

100×150 Retail & Showroom

15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×150 Retail & Showroom | Steel and Stud — From $240,550
12
100×150 Retail & Showroom
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$274,250$240,550SAVE $33,700
or $5011/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×150Retail & Showroom
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×150 Retail & Showroom, engineered for code-compliant business use.

100×150 delivers 15000 sq ft of code-compliant retail & showroom space. Commercial real estate buyers building auto, RV, or boat showrooms use this size to display 30+ vehicles with a customer lounge and service.

You're viewing:Retail & Showroom·Size100×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$240,550$274,250Save $33,700
or as low as $5011/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×150
100×120
smaller
$221,500
100×150
this size
$240,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 15,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Storefront Glass
  • Wainscoting
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X150-RETAIL-SHOWROOMBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your big-box showroom.

100 feet wide × 150 feet long. Engineered storefront glazing + side loading dock. 100×150 delivers 15000 sq ft of code-compliant retail & showroom space.

Full-glass storefrontShowroom + Demo floorSTOCKROOM + RECEIVING + OFFICE100′ × 150′ · 15,000 sq ft · big-box showroom

Full-glass storefront · Showroom + Demo floor · Stockroom + Receiving + Office

Full-glass storefront at the front, showroom + demo floor in the middle, stockroom + receiving + office at the rear. Capacity: ~9000 sf showroom, 4500 sf stock. Commercial real estate buyers building auto, RV, or boat showrooms use this size to display 30+ vehicles with a customer lounge and service write-up area.

💡 Pro tip:Showroom Curb Appeal. Size affords: mezzanine office, loading dock, multiple POS stations.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×150 Retail & Showroom in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Retail & Showroom.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
15,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Retail & Showroom spec sheet.

Width100'
Length150' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space15,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Retail & Showroom.

DAILY USEEveryday retail & showroom
Everyday retail & showroom
15,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a retail & showroom.
STORAGE OVERFLOWretail & showroom + seasonal storage
retail & showroom + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×150 Retail & Showroom — what makes it different.

15,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$5011/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×150 retail & showroom is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $5011/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×150?

15,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 150′ footprint with 15,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $120,000–$180,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Retail & Showroom shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×150 Retail & Showroom buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×150 Retail & Showroom

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Retail & Showroom · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$67,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Retail & Showroom also viewed:

🏢 100×150

Distribution Warehouse

100×150 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×150

Manufacturing Facility

100×150 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×150

Commercial Workshop

100×150 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×150

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×150 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×150

Aircraft Hangar

100×150 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×150

Cold Storage Facility

100×150 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🌾 100×150

Indoor Riding Arena

100×150 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏭 100×150

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×150 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×150

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×150 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Retail & Showroom questions, answered.

How much does a 100×150 retail & showroom cost?

A 100×150 retail & showroom from Steel and Stud starts at $240,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $5011/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×150 retail & showroom price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud retail & showroom ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×150 retail & showroom?

Almost always for 15,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud retail & showroom different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×150 retail & showroom need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×150 retail & showroom delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×150 retail & showroom without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $5011/month on a 100×150 retail & showroom.

What warranty comes with the 100×150 retail & showroom?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×150 retail & showroom in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×150 retail & showroom meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Retail & Showroom quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$240,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

100×150 Retail & Showroom

15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×150 Retail & Showroom | Steel and Stud — From $240,550
12
100×150 Retail & Showroom
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$274,250$240,550SAVE $33,700
or $5011/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×150Retail & Showroom
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×150 Retail & Showroom, engineered for code-compliant business use.

100×150 delivers 15000 sq ft of code-compliant retail & showroom space. Commercial real estate buyers building auto, RV, or boat showrooms use this size to display 30+ vehicles with a customer lounge and service.

You're viewing:Retail & Showroom·Size100×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$240,550$274,250Save $33,700
or as low as $5011/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×150
100×120
smaller
$221,500
100×150
this size
$240,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 15,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Storefront Glass
  • Wainscoting
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X150-RETAIL-SHOWROOMBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your big-box showroom.

100 feet wide × 150 feet long. Engineered storefront glazing + side loading dock. 100×150 delivers 15000 sq ft of code-compliant retail & showroom space.

Full-glass storefrontShowroom + Demo floorSTOCKROOM + RECEIVING + OFFICE100′ × 150′ · 15,000 sq ft · big-box showroom

Full-glass storefront · Showroom + Demo floor · Stockroom + Receiving + Office

Full-glass storefront at the front, showroom + demo floor in the middle, stockroom + receiving + office at the rear. Capacity: ~9000 sf showroom, 4500 sf stock. Commercial real estate buyers building auto, RV, or boat showrooms use this size to display 30+ vehicles with a customer lounge and service write-up area.

💡 Pro tip:Showroom Curb Appeal. Size affords: mezzanine office, loading dock, multiple POS stations.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×150 Retail & Showroom in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Retail & Showroom.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
15,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Retail & Showroom spec sheet.

Width100'
Length150' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space15,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Retail & Showroom.

DAILY USEEveryday retail & showroom
Everyday retail & showroom
15,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a retail & showroom.
STORAGE OVERFLOWretail & showroom + seasonal storage
retail & showroom + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×150 Retail & Showroom — what makes it different.

15,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$5011/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×150 retail & showroom is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $5011/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×150?

15,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 150′ footprint with 15,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $120,000–$180,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Retail & Showroom shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×150 Retail & Showroom buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×150 Retail & Showroom

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Retail & Showroom · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$67,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Retail & Showroom also viewed:

🏢 100×150

Distribution Warehouse

100×150 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×150

Manufacturing Facility

100×150 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×150

Commercial Workshop

100×150 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×150

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×150 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×150

Aircraft Hangar

100×150 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×150

Cold Storage Facility

100×150 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🌾 100×150

Indoor Riding Arena

100×150 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏭 100×150

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×150 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×150

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×150 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Retail & Showroom questions, answered.

How much does a 100×150 retail & showroom cost?

A 100×150 retail & showroom from Steel and Stud starts at $240,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $5011/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×150 retail & showroom price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud retail & showroom ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×150 retail & showroom?

Almost always for 15,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud retail & showroom different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×150 retail & showroom need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×150 retail & showroom delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×150 retail & showroom without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $5011/month on a 100×150 retail & showroom.

What warranty comes with the 100×150 retail & showroom?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×150 retail & showroom in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×150 retail & showroom meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Retail & Showroom quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$240,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

100×150 Equipment & Hay Barn

15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×150 Equipment & Hay Barn | Steel and Stud — From $239,350
12
100×150 Equipment & Hay Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$272,850$239,350SAVE $33,500
or $4986/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×150Equipment & Hay Barn
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×150 Equipment & Hay Barn, built for farm and ranch demands.

Our 100×150 equipment & hay barn fits 100-foot widths and 150-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads. 100×150 delivers 12500 sq ft of rugged equipment & hay barn space.

You're viewing:Equipment & Hay Barn·Size100×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$239,350$272,850Save $33,500
or as low as $4986/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×150
100×120
smaller
$220,300
100×150
this size
$239,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 15,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Open Gable
  • Lean-To Add-On
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X150-EQUIPMENT-HAY-BABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your commodity hay barn.

100 feet wide × 150 feet long. Open gables vent moisture off fresh-cut hay. Our 100×150 equipment & hay barn fits 100-foot widths and 150-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads.

High-stack bale storageEQUIPMENT ALLEYGrain / feed room + scale100′ × 150′ · 15,000 sq ft · commodity hay barn

High-stack bale storage · Equipment alley · Grain / feed room + scale

High-stack bale storage at the front, equipment alley in the middle, grain / feed room + scale at the rear. Capacity: ~2,811 sq bales at 3-high — telehandler stackable higher. 100×150 delivers 12500 sq ft of rugged equipment & hay barn space.

💡 Pro tip:Drive-Through. Size affords: telehandler-height stacking, commodity bays, truck scale apron.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×150 Equipment & Hay Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equipment & Hay Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
15,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equipment & Hay Barn spec sheet.

Width100'
Length150' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space15,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equipment & Hay Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday equipment & hay barn
Everyday equipment & hay barn
15,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equipment & hay barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequipment & hay barn + seasonal storage
equipment & hay barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×150 Equipment & Hay Barn — what makes it different.

15,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4986/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×150 equipment & hay barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4986/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×150?

15,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 150′ footprint with 15,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $120,000–$180,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equipment & Hay Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×150 Equipment & Hay Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×150 Equipment & Hay Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Equipment & Hay Barn · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$67,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equipment & Hay Barn also viewed:

🏢 100×150

Distribution Warehouse

100×150 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×150

Manufacturing Facility

100×150 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×150

Commercial Workshop

100×150 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🏢 100×150

Aircraft Hangar

100×150 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×150

Cold Storage Facility

100×150 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🌾 100×150

Indoor Riding Arena

100×150 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×150

Retail & Showroom

100×150 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×150

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×150 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×150

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×150 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equipment & Hay Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 100×150 equipment & hay barn cost?

A 100×150 equipment & hay barn from Steel and Stud starts at $239,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4986/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×150 equipment & hay barn price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud equipment & hay barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×150 equipment & hay barn?

Almost always for 15,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equipment & hay barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×150 equipment & hay barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×150 equipment & hay barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×150 equipment & hay barn without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4986/month on a 100×150 equipment & hay barn.

What warranty comes with the 100×150 equipment & hay barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×150 equipment & hay barn in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×150 equipment & hay barn stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Equipment & Hay Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$239,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

100×150 Equipment & Hay Barn

15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×150 Equipment & Hay Barn | Steel and Stud — From $239,350
12
100×150 Equipment & Hay Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$272,850$239,350SAVE $33,500
or $4986/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×150Equipment & Hay Barn
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×150 Equipment & Hay Barn, built for farm and ranch demands.

Our 100×150 equipment & hay barn fits 100-foot widths and 150-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads. 100×150 delivers 12500 sq ft of rugged equipment & hay barn space.

You're viewing:Equipment & Hay Barn·Size100×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$239,350$272,850Save $33,500
or as low as $4986/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×150
100×120
smaller
$220,300
100×150
this size
$239,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 15,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Open Gable
  • Lean-To Add-On
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X150-EQUIPMENT-HAY-BABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your commodity hay barn.

100 feet wide × 150 feet long. Open gables vent moisture off fresh-cut hay. Our 100×150 equipment & hay barn fits 100-foot widths and 150-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads.

High-stack bale storageEQUIPMENT ALLEYGrain / feed room + scale100′ × 150′ · 15,000 sq ft · commodity hay barn

High-stack bale storage · Equipment alley · Grain / feed room + scale

High-stack bale storage at the front, equipment alley in the middle, grain / feed room + scale at the rear. Capacity: ~2,811 sq bales at 3-high — telehandler stackable higher. 100×150 delivers 12500 sq ft of rugged equipment & hay barn space.

💡 Pro tip:Drive-Through. Size affords: telehandler-height stacking, commodity bays, truck scale apron.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×150 Equipment & Hay Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equipment & Hay Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
15,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equipment & Hay Barn spec sheet.

Width100'
Length150' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space15,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equipment & Hay Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday equipment & hay barn
Everyday equipment & hay barn
15,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equipment & hay barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequipment & hay barn + seasonal storage
equipment & hay barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×150 Equipment & Hay Barn — what makes it different.

15,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4986/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×150 equipment & hay barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4986/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×150?

15,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 150′ footprint with 15,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $120,000–$180,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equipment & Hay Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×150 Equipment & Hay Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×150 Equipment & Hay Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Equipment & Hay Barn · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$67,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equipment & Hay Barn also viewed:

🏢 100×150

Distribution Warehouse

100×150 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×150

Manufacturing Facility

100×150 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×150

Commercial Workshop

100×150 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🏢 100×150

Aircraft Hangar

100×150 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×150

Cold Storage Facility

100×150 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🌾 100×150

Indoor Riding Arena

100×150 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×150

Retail & Showroom

100×150 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×150

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×150 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×150

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×150 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equipment & Hay Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 100×150 equipment & hay barn cost?

A 100×150 equipment & hay barn from Steel and Stud starts at $239,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4986/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×150 equipment & hay barn price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud equipment & hay barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×150 equipment & hay barn?

Almost always for 15,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equipment & hay barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×150 equipment & hay barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×150 equipment & hay barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×150 equipment & hay barn without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4986/month on a 100×150 equipment & hay barn.

What warranty comes with the 100×150 equipment & hay barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×150 equipment & hay barn in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×150 equipment & hay barn stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Equipment & Hay Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$239,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

100×150 Indoor Riding Arena

15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×150 Indoor Riding Arena | Steel and Stud — From $239,350
12
100×150 Indoor Riding Arena
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$272,850$239,350SAVE $33,500
or $4986/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×150Indoor Riding Arena
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×150 Indoor Riding Arena, built for farm and ranch demands.

Large indoor riding arena with mounted-rider clearance, kickwall reinforcement up to 8 feet, and a side lean-to for tack rooms or stalls. Galvanized framing handles ammonia and humidity from year-round equine use.

You're viewing:Indoor Riding Arena·Size100×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$239,350$272,850Save $33,500
or as low as $4986/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×150
100×120
smaller
$220,300
100×150
this size
$239,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 15,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Up to 20’+ Tall
  • Kickwall Ready
  • Heavy Duty
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X150-INDOOR-RIDING-ARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your full riding arena.

100 feet wide × 150 feet long. Engineered clear-span trusses, no interior columns. Large indoor riding arena with mounted-rider clearance, kickwall reinforcement up to 8 feet, and a side lean-to for tack rooms or stalls.

Competition-size riding floorRAIL + SPECTATOR LANEAttached stalls + tack wing100′ × 150′ · 15,000 sq ft · full riding arena

Competition-size riding floor · Rail + spectator lane · Attached stalls + tack wing

Competition-size riding floor at the front, rail + spectator lane in the middle, attached stalls + tack wing at the rear. Capacity: 100×150 clear span — jumping + dressage work. Galvanized framing handles ammonia and humidity from year-round equine use.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: attached stable wing, judge stand, sprinkler dust control.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×150 Indoor Riding Arena in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Indoor Riding Arena.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
15,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Indoor Riding Arena spec sheet.

Width100'
Length150' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space15,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Indoor Riding Arena.

DAILY USEEveryday indoor riding arena
Everyday indoor riding arena
15,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a indoor riding arena.
STORAGE OVERFLOWindoor riding arena + seasonal storage
indoor riding arena + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×150 Indoor Riding Arena — what makes it different.

15,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4986/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×150 indoor riding arena is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4986/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×150?

15,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 150′ footprint with 15,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $120,000–$180,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Indoor Riding Arena shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×150 Indoor Riding Arena buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×150 Indoor Riding Arena

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Indoor Riding Arena · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$67,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Indoor Riding Arena also viewed:

🏢 100×150

Distribution Warehouse

100×150 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×150

Manufacturing Facility

100×150 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×150

Commercial Workshop

100×150 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×150

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×150 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×150

Aircraft Hangar

100×150 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×150

Cold Storage Facility

100×150 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🏢 100×150

Retail & Showroom

100×150 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×150

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×150 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×150

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×150 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Indoor Riding Arena questions, answered.

How much does a 100×150 indoor riding arena cost?

A 100×150 indoor riding arena from Steel and Stud starts at $239,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4986/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×150 indoor riding arena price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud indoor riding arena ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×150 indoor riding arena?

Almost always for 15,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud indoor riding arena different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×150 indoor riding arena need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×150 indoor riding arena delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×150 indoor riding arena without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4986/month on a 100×150 indoor riding arena.

What warranty comes with the 100×150 indoor riding arena?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×150 indoor riding arena in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×150 indoor riding arena stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Indoor Riding Arena quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$239,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

100×150 Indoor Riding Arena

15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×150 Indoor Riding Arena | Steel and Stud — From $239,350
12
100×150 Indoor Riding Arena
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$272,850$239,350SAVE $33,500
or $4986/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×150Indoor Riding Arena
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×150 Indoor Riding Arena, built for farm and ranch demands.

Large indoor riding arena with mounted-rider clearance, kickwall reinforcement up to 8 feet, and a side lean-to for tack rooms or stalls. Galvanized framing handles ammonia and humidity from year-round equine use.

You're viewing:Indoor Riding Arena·Size100×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$239,350$272,850Save $33,500
or as low as $4986/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×150
100×120
smaller
$220,300
100×150
this size
$239,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 15,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Up to 20’+ Tall
  • Kickwall Ready
  • Heavy Duty
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X150-INDOOR-RIDING-ARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your full riding arena.

100 feet wide × 150 feet long. Engineered clear-span trusses, no interior columns. Large indoor riding arena with mounted-rider clearance, kickwall reinforcement up to 8 feet, and a side lean-to for tack rooms or stalls.

Competition-size riding floorRAIL + SPECTATOR LANEAttached stalls + tack wing100′ × 150′ · 15,000 sq ft · full riding arena

Competition-size riding floor · Rail + spectator lane · Attached stalls + tack wing

Competition-size riding floor at the front, rail + spectator lane in the middle, attached stalls + tack wing at the rear. Capacity: 100×150 clear span — jumping + dressage work. Galvanized framing handles ammonia and humidity from year-round equine use.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: attached stable wing, judge stand, sprinkler dust control.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×150 Indoor Riding Arena in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Indoor Riding Arena.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
15,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Indoor Riding Arena spec sheet.

Width100'
Length150' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space15,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Indoor Riding Arena.

DAILY USEEveryday indoor riding arena
Everyday indoor riding arena
15,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a indoor riding arena.
STORAGE OVERFLOWindoor riding arena + seasonal storage
indoor riding arena + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×150 Indoor Riding Arena — what makes it different.

15,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4986/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×150 indoor riding arena is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4986/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×150?

15,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 150′ footprint with 15,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $120,000–$180,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Indoor Riding Arena shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×150 Indoor Riding Arena buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×150 Indoor Riding Arena

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Indoor Riding Arena · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$67,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Indoor Riding Arena also viewed:

🏢 100×150

Distribution Warehouse

100×150 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×150

Manufacturing Facility

100×150 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×150

Commercial Workshop

100×150 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×150

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×150 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×150

Aircraft Hangar

100×150 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×150

Cold Storage Facility

100×150 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🏢 100×150

Retail & Showroom

100×150 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×150

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×150 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×150

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×150 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Indoor Riding Arena questions, answered.

How much does a 100×150 indoor riding arena cost?

A 100×150 indoor riding arena from Steel and Stud starts at $239,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4986/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×150 indoor riding arena price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud indoor riding arena ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×150 indoor riding arena?

Almost always for 15,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud indoor riding arena different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×150 indoor riding arena need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×150 indoor riding arena delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×150 indoor riding arena without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4986/month on a 100×150 indoor riding arena.

What warranty comes with the 100×150 indoor riding arena?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×150 indoor riding arena in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×150 indoor riding arena stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Indoor Riding Arena quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$239,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

100×150 Sports & Recreation Facility

15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×150 Sports & Recreation Facility | Steel and Stud — From $240,650
12
100×150 Sports & Recreation Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$274,350$240,650SAVE $33,700
or $5014/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×150Sports & Recreation Facility
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×150 Sports & Recreation Facility, engineered to code for assembly use.

Looking for a 100×150 sports & recreation facility? At 15000 sq ft, this footprint suits public assembly, community use, or worship space. Schools and parks departments build indoor practice facilities, batting cages.

You're viewing:Sports & Recreation Facility·Size100×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$240,650$274,350Save $33,700
or as low as $5014/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×150
100×120
smaller
$221,600
100×150
this size
$240,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 15,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • 24' Eaves
  • Skylights
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X150-SPORTS-RECREATIOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your indoor sports complex.

100 feet wide × 150 feet long. Column-free at full width for tournament layouts. Looking for a 100×150 sports & recreation facility? At 15000 sq ft, this footprint suits public assembly, community use, or worship space.

8-court gridTURF / MULTI-SPORT ZONELobby + lockers + mezzanine viewing100′ × 150′ · 15,000 sq ft · indoor sports complex

8-court grid · Turf / multi-sport zone · Lobby + lockers + mezzanine viewing

8-court grid at the front, turf / multi-sport zone in the middle, lobby + lockers + mezzanine viewing at the rear. Capacity: 8 courts + turf training zone. Schools and parks departments build indoor practice facilities, batting cages, or pickleball courts at this footprint.

💡 Pro tip:Court-Height Clearance. Size affords: mezzanine viewing, locker rooms, pro shop.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×150 Sports & Recreation Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Sports & Recreation Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
15,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Sports & Recreation Facility spec sheet.

Width100'
Length150' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space15,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Sports & Recreation Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday sports & recreation facility
Everyday sports & recreation facility
15,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a sports & recreation facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsports & recreation facility + seasonal storage
sports & recreation facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×150 Sports & Recreation Facility — what makes it different.

15,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$5014/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×150 sports & recreation facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $5014/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×150?

15,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 150′ footprint with 15,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $120,000–$180,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Sports & Recreation Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×150 Sports & Recreation Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×150 Sports & Recreation Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Sports & Recreation Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$67,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Sports & Recreation Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×150

Distribution Warehouse

100×150 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×150

Manufacturing Facility

100×150 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×150

Commercial Workshop

100×150 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×150

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×150 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×150

Aircraft Hangar

100×150 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×150

Cold Storage Facility

100×150 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🌾 100×150

Indoor Riding Arena

100×150 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×150

Retail & Showroom

100×150 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×150

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×150 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Sports & Recreation Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×150 sports & recreation facility cost?

A 100×150 sports & recreation facility from Steel and Stud starts at $240,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $5014/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×150 sports & recreation facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud sports & recreation facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×150 sports & recreation facility?

Almost always for 15,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud sports & recreation facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×150 sports & recreation facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×150 sports & recreation facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×150 sports & recreation facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $5014/month on a 100×150 sports & recreation facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×150 sports & recreation facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×150 sports & recreation facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×150 sports & recreation facility pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud's engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Sports & Recreation Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$240,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

100×150 Sports & Recreation Facility

15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×150 Sports & Recreation Facility | Steel and Stud — From $240,650
12
100×150 Sports & Recreation Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$274,350$240,650SAVE $33,700
or $5014/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×150Sports & Recreation Facility
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×150 Sports & Recreation Facility, engineered to code for assembly use.

Looking for a 100×150 sports & recreation facility? At 15000 sq ft, this footprint suits public assembly, community use, or worship space. Schools and parks departments build indoor practice facilities, batting cages.

You're viewing:Sports & Recreation Facility·Size100×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$240,650$274,350Save $33,700
or as low as $5014/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×150
100×120
smaller
$221,600
100×150
this size
$240,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 15,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • 24' Eaves
  • Skylights
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X150-SPORTS-RECREATIOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your indoor sports complex.

100 feet wide × 150 feet long. Column-free at full width for tournament layouts. Looking for a 100×150 sports & recreation facility? At 15000 sq ft, this footprint suits public assembly, community use, or worship space.

8-court gridTURF / MULTI-SPORT ZONELobby + lockers + mezzanine viewing100′ × 150′ · 15,000 sq ft · indoor sports complex

8-court grid · Turf / multi-sport zone · Lobby + lockers + mezzanine viewing

8-court grid at the front, turf / multi-sport zone in the middle, lobby + lockers + mezzanine viewing at the rear. Capacity: 8 courts + turf training zone. Schools and parks departments build indoor practice facilities, batting cages, or pickleball courts at this footprint.

💡 Pro tip:Court-Height Clearance. Size affords: mezzanine viewing, locker rooms, pro shop.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×150 Sports & Recreation Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Sports & Recreation Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
15,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Sports & Recreation Facility spec sheet.

Width100'
Length150' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space15,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Sports & Recreation Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday sports & recreation facility
Everyday sports & recreation facility
15,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a sports & recreation facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsports & recreation facility + seasonal storage
sports & recreation facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×150 Sports & Recreation Facility — what makes it different.

15,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$5014/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×150 sports & recreation facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $5014/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×150?

15,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 150′ footprint with 15,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $120,000–$180,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Sports & Recreation Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×150 Sports & Recreation Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×150 Sports & Recreation Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Sports & Recreation Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$67,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Sports & Recreation Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×150

Distribution Warehouse

100×150 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×150

Manufacturing Facility

100×150 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×150

Commercial Workshop

100×150 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×150

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×150 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×150

Aircraft Hangar

100×150 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×150

Cold Storage Facility

100×150 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🌾 100×150

Indoor Riding Arena

100×150 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×150

Retail & Showroom

100×150 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×150

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×150 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Sports & Recreation Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×150 sports & recreation facility cost?

A 100×150 sports & recreation facility from Steel and Stud starts at $240,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $5014/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×150 sports & recreation facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud sports & recreation facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×150 sports & recreation facility?

Almost always for 15,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud sports & recreation facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×150 sports & recreation facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×150 sports & recreation facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×150 sports & recreation facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $5014/month on a 100×150 sports & recreation facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×150 sports & recreation facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×150 sports & recreation facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×150 sports & recreation facility pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud's engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Sports & Recreation Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$240,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

16×40 Metal Carport

640 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

16′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×40 steel building delivers 640 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
16×40 Metal Carport | Steel and Stud — From $9,450
12
16×40 Metal Carport
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,750$9,450SAVE $1,300
or $197/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings16×40Metal Carport
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

16×40 Metal Carport, built for hobby and recreational use.

Open-sided 16×40 metal carports cover two vehicles parked end-to-end or a single travel trailer up to 36 feet. RV owners size up to 12-foot legs to clear a Class C roof with AC unit. Ground-anchored, no slab required.

You're viewing:Metal Carport·Size16×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,450$10,750Save $1,300
or as low as $197/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 16×40
16×40
this size
$9,450
18×40
wider
$10,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 640 sq ft enclosed
  • Open Sides
  • 12' Legs
  • Ground Anchors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X40-METAL-CARPORTBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your double carport layout.

16 feet wide × 40 feet long. Certified legs anchored to slab or ground. Open-sided 16×40 metal carports cover two vehicles parked end-to-end or a single travel trailer up to 36 feet.

1 side-by-side baysCenter post-free spanWalk-around clearance16′ × 40′ · 640 sq ft · double carport layout

1 side-by-side bays · Center post-free span · Walk-around clearance

1 side-by-side bays at the front, center post-free span in the middle, walk-around clearance at the rear. Capacity: 1 vehicles side by side. RV owners size up to 12-foot legs to clear a Class C roof with AC unit.

💡 Pro tip:From $9,450. Size affords: half sides, extra panel courses, lean-off storage.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 16×40 Metal Carport in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Metal Carport.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
640 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Metal Carport spec sheet.

Width16'
Length40' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space640 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Metal Carport.

DAILY USEEveryday metal carport
Everyday metal carport
640 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a metal carport.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmetal carport + seasonal storage
metal carport + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

16×40 Metal Carport — what makes it different.

640sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$197/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 16×40 metal carport is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $197/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 16×40?

640 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 16′ × 40′ footprint with 640 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,120–$7,680 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Metal Carport shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 16×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 16×40 Metal Carport buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 16×40 Metal Carport

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Metal Carport · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
17×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,880+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Metal Carport also viewed:

🏡 16×40

One Car Garage with Workshop

16×40 one car garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize One Car Garage with Workshop →
🏡 16×40

Metal Workshop

16×40 metal workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Workshop →
🎯 16×40

RV Cover with Storage

16×40 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🌾 16×40

Horse Tack & Feed Barn

16×40 horse tack & feed barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Tack & Feed Barn →
🌾 16×40

Equipment & Implement Storage

16×40 equipment & implement storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Implement Storage →
🏡 16×40

Detached Garage

16×40 detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached Garage →
🎯 16×40

Hunting Cabin Shell

16×40 hunting cabin shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hunting Cabin Shell →
🏢 16×40

Mechanic's Shop

16×40 mechanic's shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mechanic's Shop →
🌾 16×40

Hay & Feed Lean-To Base

16×40 hay & feed lean-to base configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hay & Feed Lean-To Base →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Metal Carport questions, answered.

How much does a 16×40 metal carport cost?

A 16×40 metal carport from Steel and Stud starts at $9,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $197/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 16×40 metal carport price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud metal carport ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 16×40 metal carport?

Almost always for 640+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud metal carport different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 16×40 metal carport need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 16×40 metal carport delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 16×40 metal carport without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $197/month on a 16×40 metal carport.

What warranty comes with the 16×40 metal carport?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 16×40 metal carport in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 16×40 metal carport for year-round use?

Yes — Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a metal carport to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Metal Carport quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$9,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

16×40 Metal Carport

640 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

16′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×40 steel building delivers 640 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
16×40 Metal Carport | Steel and Stud — From $9,450
12
16×40 Metal Carport
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,750$9,450SAVE $1,300
or $197/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings16×40Metal Carport
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

16×40 Metal Carport, built for hobby and recreational use.

Open-sided 16×40 metal carports cover two vehicles parked end-to-end or a single travel trailer up to 36 feet. RV owners size up to 12-foot legs to clear a Class C roof with AC unit. Ground-anchored, no slab required.

You're viewing:Metal Carport·Size16×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,450$10,750Save $1,300
or as low as $197/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 16×40
16×40
this size
$9,450
18×40
wider
$10,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 640 sq ft enclosed
  • Open Sides
  • 12' Legs
  • Ground Anchors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X40-METAL-CARPORTBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your double carport layout.

16 feet wide × 40 feet long. Certified legs anchored to slab or ground. Open-sided 16×40 metal carports cover two vehicles parked end-to-end or a single travel trailer up to 36 feet.

1 side-by-side baysCenter post-free spanWalk-around clearance16′ × 40′ · 640 sq ft · double carport layout

1 side-by-side bays · Center post-free span · Walk-around clearance

1 side-by-side bays at the front, center post-free span in the middle, walk-around clearance at the rear. Capacity: 1 vehicles side by side. RV owners size up to 12-foot legs to clear a Class C roof with AC unit.

💡 Pro tip:From $9,450. Size affords: half sides, extra panel courses, lean-off storage.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 16×40 Metal Carport in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Metal Carport.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
640 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Metal Carport spec sheet.

Width16'
Length40' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space640 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Metal Carport.

DAILY USEEveryday metal carport
Everyday metal carport
640 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a metal carport.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmetal carport + seasonal storage
metal carport + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

16×40 Metal Carport — what makes it different.

640sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$197/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 16×40 metal carport is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $197/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 16×40?

640 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 16′ × 40′ footprint with 640 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,120–$7,680 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Metal Carport shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 16×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 16×40 Metal Carport buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 16×40 Metal Carport

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Metal Carport · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
17×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,880+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Metal Carport also viewed:

🏡 16×40

One Car Garage with Workshop

16×40 one car garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize One Car Garage with Workshop →
🏡 16×40

Metal Workshop

16×40 metal workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Workshop →
🎯 16×40

RV Cover with Storage

16×40 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🌾 16×40

Horse Tack & Feed Barn

16×40 horse tack & feed barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Tack & Feed Barn →
🌾 16×40

Equipment & Implement Storage

16×40 equipment & implement storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Implement Storage →
🏡 16×40

Detached Garage

16×40 detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached Garage →
🎯 16×40

Hunting Cabin Shell

16×40 hunting cabin shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hunting Cabin Shell →
🏢 16×40

Mechanic's Shop

16×40 mechanic's shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mechanic's Shop →
🌾 16×40

Hay & Feed Lean-To Base

16×40 hay & feed lean-to base configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hay & Feed Lean-To Base →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Metal Carport questions, answered.

How much does a 16×40 metal carport cost?

A 16×40 metal carport from Steel and Stud starts at $9,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $197/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 16×40 metal carport price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud metal carport ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 16×40 metal carport?

Almost always for 640+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud metal carport different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 16×40 metal carport need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 16×40 metal carport delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 16×40 metal carport without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $197/month on a 16×40 metal carport.

What warranty comes with the 16×40 metal carport?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 16×40 metal carport in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 16×40 metal carport for year-round use?

Yes — Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a metal carport to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Metal Carport quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

40×48 Home Workshop & Garage

1,920 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

40′ x 48′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 40×48 steel building delivers 1,920 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
40×48 Home Workshop & Garage | Steel and Stud — From $35,150
12
40×48 Home Workshop & Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$40,050$35,150SAVE $4,900
or $732/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings40×48Home Workshop & Garage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

40×48 Home Workshop & Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Hobbyists and homeowners fit three vehicles plus a full workshop with workbench, tool wall, and lift bay. The 40-foot clear span means no posts to work around when rolling out a lawn tractor or a project car. Walk-in.

You're viewing:Home Workshop & Garage·Size40×48·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$35,150$40,050Save $4,900
or as low as $732/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 40×48
40×48
this size
$35,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,920 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Boxed Eave Roof
  • Walk-In Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-40X48-HOME-WORKSHOP-GABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

40 feet wide × 48 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. Hobbyists and homeowners fit three vehicles plus a full workshop with workbench, tool wall, and lift bay.

4 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay40′ × 48′ · 1,920 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

4 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

4 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 4 vehicles + full hobby shop. The 40-foot clear span means no posts to work around when rolling out a lawn tractor or a project car.

💡 Pro tip:Free Install. Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 40×48 Home Workshop & Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Home Workshop & Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,920 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 40×48 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Home Workshop & Garage spec sheet.

Width40'
Length48' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,920 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Home Workshop & Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday home workshop & garage
Everyday home workshop & garage
1,920 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a home workshop & garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhome workshop & garage + seasonal storage
home workshop & garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

40×48 Home Workshop & Garage — what makes it different.

1,920sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$732/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 40×48 home workshop & garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $732/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 40×48?

1,920 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 40′ × 48′ footprint with 1,920 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $15,360–$23,040 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Home Workshop & Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 40×48 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 40×48 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 40×48 Home Workshop & Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 40×48 Home Workshop & Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Home Workshop & Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
41×49×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$8,640+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Home Workshop & Garage also viewed:

🏢 40×48

Three-Bay Commercial Garage

40×48 three-bay commercial garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$37,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Bay Commercial Garage →
🏢 40×48

Fabrication Shop

40×48 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$37,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🌾 40×48

Horse Barn

40×48 horse barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$35,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn →
🌾 40×48

Hay & Equipment Barn

40×48 hay & equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$35,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hay & Equipment Barn →
🏭 40×48

Fleet Garage

40×48 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$37,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 40×48

Independent Auto Repair Shop

40×48 independent auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$37,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Independent Auto Repair Shop →
🎯 40×48

RV & Boat Garage

40×48 rv & boat garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$35,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV & Boat Garage →
🏛️ 40×48

Church or Community Hall

40×48 church or community hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$37,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church or Community Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Home Workshop & Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 40×48 home workshop & garage cost?

A 40×48 home workshop & garage from Steel and Stud starts at $35,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $732/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 40×48 home workshop & garage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud home workshop & garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 40×48 home workshop & garage?

Almost always for 1,920+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud home workshop & garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 40×48 home workshop & garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 40×48 home workshop & garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 40×48 home workshop & garage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $732/month on a 40×48 home workshop & garage.

What warranty comes with the 40×48 home workshop & garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 40×48 home workshop & garage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 40×48 home workshop & garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 40×48 home workshop & garage typically adds $15,360–$23,040 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Home Workshop & Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$35,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

40×48 Home Workshop & Garage

1,920 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

40′ x 48′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 40×48 steel building delivers 1,920 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
40×48 Home Workshop & Garage | Steel and Stud — From $35,150
12
40×48 Home Workshop & Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$40,050$35,150SAVE $4,900
or $732/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings40×48Home Workshop & Garage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

40×48 Home Workshop & Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Hobbyists and homeowners fit three vehicles plus a full workshop with workbench, tool wall, and lift bay. The 40-foot clear span means no posts to work around when rolling out a lawn tractor or a project car. Walk-in.

You're viewing:Home Workshop & Garage·Size40×48·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$35,150$40,050Save $4,900
or as low as $732/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 40×48
40×48
this size
$35,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,920 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Boxed Eave Roof
  • Walk-In Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-40X48-HOME-WORKSHOP-GABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

40 feet wide × 48 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. Hobbyists and homeowners fit three vehicles plus a full workshop with workbench, tool wall, and lift bay.

4 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay40′ × 48′ · 1,920 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

4 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

4 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 4 vehicles + full hobby shop. The 40-foot clear span means no posts to work around when rolling out a lawn tractor or a project car.

💡 Pro tip:Free Install. Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 40×48 Home Workshop & Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Home Workshop & Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,920 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 40×48 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Home Workshop & Garage spec sheet.

Width40'
Length48' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,920 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Home Workshop & Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday home workshop & garage
Everyday home workshop & garage
1,920 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a home workshop & garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhome workshop & garage + seasonal storage
home workshop & garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

40×48 Home Workshop & Garage — what makes it different.

1,920sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$732/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 40×48 home workshop & garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $732/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 40×48?

1,920 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 40′ × 48′ footprint with 1,920 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $15,360–$23,040 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Home Workshop & Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 40×48 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 40×48 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 40×48 Home Workshop & Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 40×48 Home Workshop & Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Home Workshop & Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
41×49×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$8,640+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Home Workshop & Garage also viewed:

🏢 40×48

Three-Bay Commercial Garage

40×48 three-bay commercial garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$37,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Bay Commercial Garage →
🏢 40×48

Fabrication Shop

40×48 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$37,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🌾 40×48

Horse Barn

40×48 horse barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$35,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn →
🌾 40×48

Hay & Equipment Barn

40×48 hay & equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$35,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hay & Equipment Barn →
🏭 40×48

Fleet Garage

40×48 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$37,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 40×48

Independent Auto Repair Shop

40×48 independent auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$37,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Independent Auto Repair Shop →
🎯 40×48

RV & Boat Garage

40×48 rv & boat garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$35,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV & Boat Garage →
🏛️ 40×48

Church or Community Hall

40×48 church or community hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$37,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church or Community Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Home Workshop & Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 40×48 home workshop & garage cost?

A 40×48 home workshop & garage from Steel and Stud starts at $35,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $732/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 40×48 home workshop & garage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud home workshop & garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 40×48 home workshop & garage?

Almost always for 1,920+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud home workshop & garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 40×48 home workshop & garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 40×48 home workshop & garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 40×48 home workshop & garage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $732/month on a 40×48 home workshop & garage.

What warranty comes with the 40×48 home workshop & garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 40×48 home workshop & garage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 40×48 home workshop & garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 40×48 home workshop & garage typically adds $15,360–$23,040 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Home Workshop & Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$35,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

25×40 Workshop / Hobby Space

1,000 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

25′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×40 steel building delivers 1,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
25×40 Workshop / Hobby Space | Steel and Stud — From $12,650
12
25×40 Workshop / Hobby Space
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$14,400$12,650SAVE $1,750
or $264/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings25×40Workshop / Hobby Space
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×40 Workshop / Hobby Space, built for daily backyard use.

1,000 sq ft clear-span steel workshop for woodworking, auto restoration, welding, and crafts. The wider 25-foot span gives more room for tool walls, car lifts, dust collection, and heavy benches.

You're viewing:Workshop / Hobby Space·Size25×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$12,650$14,400Save $1,750
or as low as $264/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×40
25×40
this size
$12,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From style="margin-top:18px"0,995
  • Clear Span
  • 14 Gauge
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X40-WORKSHOP-HOBBY-SBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your workshop layout.

25 feet wide × 40 feet long. Side-load + walk-in, dust-collection ready. 1,000 sq ft clear-span steel workshop for woodworking, auto restoration, welding, and crafts.

Workbench wallTABLE SAW / CENTERLumber / Material rack25′ × 40′ · 1,000 sq ft · workshop layout

Workbench wall · Table saw / Center · Lumber / Material rack

Workbench wall at the front, table saw / center in the middle, lumber / material rack at the rear. Capacity: 1-person serious shop. The wider 25-foot span gives more room for tool walls, car lifts, dust collection, and heavy benches.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: dust collection, 220V subpanel, shop sink.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×40 Workshop / Hobby Space in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Workshop / Hobby Space.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Workshop / Hobby Space spec sheet.

Width25'
Length40' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Workshop / Hobby Space.

DAILY USEEveryday workshop / hobby space
Everyday workshop / hobby space
1,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a workshop / hobby space.
STORAGE OVERFLOWworkshop / hobby space + seasonal storage
workshop / hobby space + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×40 Workshop / Hobby Space — what makes it different.

1,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$264/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×40 workshop / hobby space is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $264/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×40?

1,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 40′ footprint with 1,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,000–$12,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Workshop / Hobby Space shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 25×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×40 Workshop / Hobby Space buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×40 Workshop / Hobby Space

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Workshop / Hobby Space · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Workshop / Hobby Space also viewed:

🏡 25×40

Metal Garage (3 Cars + Storage)

25×40 metal garage (3 cars + storage) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Garage (3 Cars + Storage) →
🏡 25×40

Metal Carport (Open)

25×40 metal carport (open) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Carport (Open) →
🏢 25×40

Commercial Steel Building

25×40 commercial steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Steel Building →
🏡 25×40

RV Cover / Boat Storage

25×40 rv cover / boat storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →
🎯 25×40

Home Gym / Studio

25×40 home gym / studio configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym / Studio →
🌾 25×40

Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

25×40 metal barn (farm & ranch) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) →
🎯 25×40

Man Cave / She Shed

25×40 man cave / she shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave / She Shed →
🏭 25×40

Factory / Warehouse

25×40 factory / warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Factory / Warehouse →
🏛️ 25×40

Government / Institutional

25×40 government / institutional configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Government / Institutional →
🌾 25×40

Equestrian Arena / Tack Room

25×40 equestrian arena / tack room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equestrian Arena / Tack Room →
🏛️ 25×40

Houses of Worship

25×40 houses of worship configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Houses of Worship →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Workshop / Hobby Space questions, answered.

How much does a 25×40 workshop / hobby space cost?

A 25×40 workshop / hobby space from Steel and Stud starts at $12,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $264/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×40 workshop / hobby space price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud workshop / hobby space ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×40 workshop / hobby space?

Almost always for 1,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud workshop / hobby space different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×40 workshop / hobby space need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×40 workshop / hobby space delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×40 workshop / hobby space without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $264/month on a 25×40 workshop / hobby space.

What warranty comes with the 25×40 workshop / hobby space?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×40 workshop / hobby space in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 25×40 workshop / hobby space add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 25×40 workshop / hobby space typically adds $8,000–$12,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Workshop / Hobby Space quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$12,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

25×40 Workshop / Hobby Space

1,000 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

25′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×40 steel building delivers 1,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
25×40 Workshop / Hobby Space | Steel and Stud — From $12,650
12
25×40 Workshop / Hobby Space
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$14,400$12,650SAVE $1,750
or $264/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings25×40Workshop / Hobby Space
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×40 Workshop / Hobby Space, built for daily backyard use.

1,000 sq ft clear-span steel workshop for woodworking, auto restoration, welding, and crafts. The wider 25-foot span gives more room for tool walls, car lifts, dust collection, and heavy benches.

You're viewing:Workshop / Hobby Space·Size25×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$12,650$14,400Save $1,750
or as low as $264/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×40
25×40
this size
$12,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From style="margin-top:18px"0,995
  • Clear Span
  • 14 Gauge
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X40-WORKSHOP-HOBBY-SBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your workshop layout.

25 feet wide × 40 feet long. Side-load + walk-in, dust-collection ready. 1,000 sq ft clear-span steel workshop for woodworking, auto restoration, welding, and crafts.

Workbench wallTABLE SAW / CENTERLumber / Material rack25′ × 40′ · 1,000 sq ft · workshop layout

Workbench wall · Table saw / Center · Lumber / Material rack

Workbench wall at the front, table saw / center in the middle, lumber / material rack at the rear. Capacity: 1-person serious shop. The wider 25-foot span gives more room for tool walls, car lifts, dust collection, and heavy benches.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: dust collection, 220V subpanel, shop sink.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×40 Workshop / Hobby Space in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Workshop / Hobby Space.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Workshop / Hobby Space spec sheet.

Width25'
Length40' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Workshop / Hobby Space.

DAILY USEEveryday workshop / hobby space
Everyday workshop / hobby space
1,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a workshop / hobby space.
STORAGE OVERFLOWworkshop / hobby space + seasonal storage
workshop / hobby space + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×40 Workshop / Hobby Space — what makes it different.

1,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$264/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×40 workshop / hobby space is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $264/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×40?

1,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 40′ footprint with 1,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,000–$12,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Workshop / Hobby Space shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 25×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×40 Workshop / Hobby Space buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×40 Workshop / Hobby Space

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Workshop / Hobby Space · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Workshop / Hobby Space also viewed:

🏡 25×40

Metal Garage (3 Cars + Storage)

25×40 metal garage (3 cars + storage) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Garage (3 Cars + Storage) →
🏡 25×40

Metal Carport (Open)

25×40 metal carport (open) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Carport (Open) →
🏢 25×40

Commercial Steel Building

25×40 commercial steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Steel Building →
🏡 25×40

RV Cover / Boat Storage

25×40 rv cover / boat storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →
🎯 25×40

Home Gym / Studio

25×40 home gym / studio configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym / Studio →
🌾 25×40

Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

25×40 metal barn (farm & ranch) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) →
🎯 25×40

Man Cave / She Shed

25×40 man cave / she shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave / She Shed →
🏭 25×40

Factory / Warehouse

25×40 factory / warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Factory / Warehouse →
🏛️ 25×40

Government / Institutional

25×40 government / institutional configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Government / Institutional →
🌾 25×40

Equestrian Arena / Tack Room

25×40 equestrian arena / tack room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equestrian Arena / Tack Room →
🏛️ 25×40

Houses of Worship

25×40 houses of worship configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Houses of Worship →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Workshop / Hobby Space questions, answered.

How much does a 25×40 workshop / hobby space cost?

A 25×40 workshop / hobby space from Steel and Stud starts at $12,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $264/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×40 workshop / hobby space price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud workshop / hobby space ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×40 workshop / hobby space?

Almost always for 1,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud workshop / hobby space different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×40 workshop / hobby space need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×40 workshop / hobby space delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×40 workshop / hobby space without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $264/month on a 25×40 workshop / hobby space.

What warranty comes with the 25×40 workshop / hobby space?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×40 workshop / hobby space in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 25×40 workshop / hobby space add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 25×40 workshop / hobby space typically adds $8,000–$12,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Workshop / Hobby Space quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$12,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

25×40 Commercial Steel Building

1,000 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

25′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×40 steel building delivers 1,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
25×40 Commercial Steel Building | Steel and Stud — From $14,500
12
25×40 Commercial Steel Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$16,550$14,500SAVE $2,050
or $302/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings25×40Commercial Steel Building
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×40 Commercial Steel Building, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Retail stores, offices, auto detailing bays, service businesses, and light warehouse use. Code-certified clear-span design with 12-gauge framing maximizes every square foot of usable space.

You're viewing:Commercial Steel Building·Size25×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$14,500$16,550Save $2,050
or as low as $302/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×40
25×40
this size
$14,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From style="margin-top:18px"4,500
  • Code Certified
  • 12 Gauge
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X40-COMMERCIAL-STEELBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your small-office layout.

25 feet wide × 40 feet long. Front client entry, rear staff entry. Retail stores, offices, auto detailing bays, service businesses, and light warehouse use.

Open desk areaPrivate office / meeting roomKITCHENETTE + FILES25′ × 40′ · 1,000 sq ft · small-office layout

Open desk area · Private office / meeting room · Kitchenette + files

Open desk area at the front, private office / meeting room in the middle, kitchenette + files at the rear. Capacity: 8 workstations. Code-certified clear-span design with 12-gauge framing maximizes every square foot of usable space.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: conference room, server closet, ADA restroom.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×40 Commercial Steel Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Commercial Steel Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Commercial Steel Building spec sheet.

Width25'
Length40' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Commercial Steel Building.

DAILY USEEveryday commercial steel building
Everyday commercial steel building
1,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a commercial steel building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommercial steel building + seasonal storage
commercial steel building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×40 Commercial Steel Building — what makes it different.

1,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$302/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×40 commercial steel building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $302/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×40?

1,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 40′ footprint with 1,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,000–$12,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Commercial Steel Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 25×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×40 Commercial Steel Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×40 Commercial Steel Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Commercial Steel Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Commercial Steel Building also viewed:

🏡 25×40

Metal Garage (3 Cars + Storage)

25×40 metal garage (3 cars + storage) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Garage (3 Cars + Storage) →
🏡 25×40

Workshop / Hobby Space

25×40 workshop / hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →
🏡 25×40

Metal Carport (Open)

25×40 metal carport (open) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Carport (Open) →
🏡 25×40

RV Cover / Boat Storage

25×40 rv cover / boat storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →
🎯 25×40

Home Gym / Studio

25×40 home gym / studio configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym / Studio →
🌾 25×40

Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

25×40 metal barn (farm & ranch) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) →
🎯 25×40

Man Cave / She Shed

25×40 man cave / she shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave / She Shed →
🏭 25×40

Factory / Warehouse

25×40 factory / warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Factory / Warehouse →
🏛️ 25×40

Government / Institutional

25×40 government / institutional configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Government / Institutional →
🌾 25×40

Equestrian Arena / Tack Room

25×40 equestrian arena / tack room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equestrian Arena / Tack Room →
🏛️ 25×40

Houses of Worship

25×40 houses of worship configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Houses of Worship →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Commercial Steel Building questions, answered.

How much does a 25×40 commercial steel building cost?

A 25×40 commercial steel building from Steel and Stud starts at $14,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $302/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×40 commercial steel building price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud commercial steel building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×40 commercial steel building?

Almost always for 1,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud commercial steel building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×40 commercial steel building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×40 commercial steel building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×40 commercial steel building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $302/month on a 25×40 commercial steel building.

What warranty comes with the 25×40 commercial steel building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×40 commercial steel building in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 25×40 commercial steel building meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Commercial Steel Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$14,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

25×40 Commercial Steel Building

1,000 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

25′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×40 steel building delivers 1,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
25×40 Commercial Steel Building | Steel and Stud — From $14,500
12
25×40 Commercial Steel Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$16,550$14,500SAVE $2,050
or $302/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings25×40Commercial Steel Building
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×40 Commercial Steel Building, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Retail stores, offices, auto detailing bays, service businesses, and light warehouse use. Code-certified clear-span design with 12-gauge framing maximizes every square foot of usable space.

You're viewing:Commercial Steel Building·Size25×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$14,500$16,550Save $2,050
or as low as $302/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×40
25×40
this size
$14,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From style="margin-top:18px"4,500
  • Code Certified
  • 12 Gauge
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X40-COMMERCIAL-STEELBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your small-office layout.

25 feet wide × 40 feet long. Front client entry, rear staff entry. Retail stores, offices, auto detailing bays, service businesses, and light warehouse use.

Open desk areaPrivate office / meeting roomKITCHENETTE + FILES25′ × 40′ · 1,000 sq ft · small-office layout

Open desk area · Private office / meeting room · Kitchenette + files

Open desk area at the front, private office / meeting room in the middle, kitchenette + files at the rear. Capacity: 8 workstations. Code-certified clear-span design with 12-gauge framing maximizes every square foot of usable space.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: conference room, server closet, ADA restroom.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×40 Commercial Steel Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Commercial Steel Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Commercial Steel Building spec sheet.

Width25'
Length40' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Commercial Steel Building.

DAILY USEEveryday commercial steel building
Everyday commercial steel building
1,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a commercial steel building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommercial steel building + seasonal storage
commercial steel building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×40 Commercial Steel Building — what makes it different.

1,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$302/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×40 commercial steel building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $302/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×40?

1,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 40′ footprint with 1,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,000–$12,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Commercial Steel Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 25×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×40 Commercial Steel Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×40 Commercial Steel Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Commercial Steel Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Commercial Steel Building also viewed:

🏡 25×40

Metal Garage (3 Cars + Storage)

25×40 metal garage (3 cars + storage) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Garage (3 Cars + Storage) →
🏡 25×40

Workshop / Hobby Space

25×40 workshop / hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →
🏡 25×40

Metal Carport (Open)

25×40 metal carport (open) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Carport (Open) →
🏡 25×40

RV Cover / Boat Storage

25×40 rv cover / boat storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →
🎯 25×40

Home Gym / Studio

25×40 home gym / studio configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym / Studio →
🌾 25×40

Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

25×40 metal barn (farm & ranch) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) →
🎯 25×40

Man Cave / She Shed

25×40 man cave / she shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave / She Shed →
🏭 25×40

Factory / Warehouse

25×40 factory / warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Factory / Warehouse →
🏛️ 25×40

Government / Institutional

25×40 government / institutional configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Government / Institutional →
🌾 25×40

Equestrian Arena / Tack Room

25×40 equestrian arena / tack room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equestrian Arena / Tack Room →
🏛️ 25×40

Houses of Worship

25×40 houses of worship configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Houses of Worship →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Commercial Steel Building questions, answered.

How much does a 25×40 commercial steel building cost?

A 25×40 commercial steel building from Steel and Stud starts at $14,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $302/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×40 commercial steel building price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud commercial steel building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×40 commercial steel building?

Almost always for 1,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud commercial steel building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×40 commercial steel building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×40 commercial steel building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×40 commercial steel building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $302/month on a 25×40 commercial steel building.

What warranty comes with the 25×40 commercial steel building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×40 commercial steel building in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 25×40 commercial steel building meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Commercial Steel Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$14,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

25×40 Man Cave / She Shed

1,000 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

25′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×40 steel building delivers 1,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
25×40 Man Cave / She Shed | Steel and Stud — From $12,650
12
25×40 Man Cave / She Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$14,400$12,650SAVE $1,750
or $264/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings25×40Man Cave / She Shed
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×40 Man Cave / She Shed, built for hobby and recreational use.

Personal retreat away from the house. Game room, music studio, art workshop, lounge, or backyard studio with room to separate activity zones. Fully insulated and pre-wired for HVAC, lighting, and entertainment.

You're viewing:Man Cave / She Shed·Size25×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$12,650$14,400Save $1,750
or as low as $264/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×40
25×40
this size
$12,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From style="margin-top:18px"0,995
  • Insulated
  • Walk-In Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X40-MAN-CAVE-SHE-SHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your finished retreat layout.

25 feet wide × 40 feet long. Plumbing wall placed for bar + bath back-to-back. Personal retreat away from the house.

Main loungeWet bar / kitchenetteBath + storage25′ × 40′ · 1,000 sq ft · finished retreat layout

Main lounge · Wet bar / kitchenette · Bath + storage

Main lounge at the front, wet bar / kitchenette in the middle, bath + storage at the rear. Capacity: entertaining space for 40 guests. Game room, music studio, art workshop, lounge, or backyard studio with room to separate activity zones.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: wet bar, half bath, media wall.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×40 Man Cave / She Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Man Cave / She Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Man Cave / She Shed spec sheet.

Width25'
Length40' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Man Cave / She Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday man cave / she shed
Everyday man cave / she shed
1,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a man cave / she shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWman cave / she shed + seasonal storage
man cave / she shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×40 Man Cave / She Shed — what makes it different.

1,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$264/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×40 man cave / she shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $264/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×40?

1,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 40′ footprint with 1,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,000–$12,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Man Cave / She Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 25×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×40 Man Cave / She Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×40 Man Cave / She Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Man Cave / She Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Man Cave / She Shed also viewed:

🏡 25×40

Metal Garage (3 Cars + Storage)

25×40 metal garage (3 cars + storage) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Garage (3 Cars + Storage) →
🏡 25×40

Workshop / Hobby Space

25×40 workshop / hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →
🏡 25×40

Metal Carport (Open)

25×40 metal carport (open) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Carport (Open) →
🏢 25×40

Commercial Steel Building

25×40 commercial steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Steel Building →
🏡 25×40

RV Cover / Boat Storage

25×40 rv cover / boat storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →
🎯 25×40

Home Gym / Studio

25×40 home gym / studio configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym / Studio →
🌾 25×40

Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

25×40 metal barn (farm & ranch) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) →
🏭 25×40

Factory / Warehouse

25×40 factory / warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Factory / Warehouse →
🏛️ 25×40

Government / Institutional

25×40 government / institutional configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Government / Institutional →
🌾 25×40

Equestrian Arena / Tack Room

25×40 equestrian arena / tack room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equestrian Arena / Tack Room →
🏛️ 25×40

Houses of Worship

25×40 houses of worship configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Houses of Worship →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Man Cave / She Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 25×40 man cave / she shed cost?

A 25×40 man cave / she shed from Steel and Stud starts at $12,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $264/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×40 man cave / she shed price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud man cave / she shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×40 man cave / she shed?

Almost always for 1,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud man cave / she shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×40 man cave / she shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×40 man cave / she shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×40 man cave / she shed without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $264/month on a 25×40 man cave / she shed.

What warranty comes with the 25×40 man cave / she shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×40 man cave / she shed in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 25×40 man cave / she shed for year-round use?

Yes — Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a man cave / she shed to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Man Cave / She Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$12,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

25×40 Man Cave / She Shed

1,000 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

25′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×40 steel building delivers 1,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
25×40 Man Cave / She Shed | Steel and Stud — From $12,650
12
25×40 Man Cave / She Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$14,400$12,650SAVE $1,750
or $264/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings25×40Man Cave / She Shed
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×40 Man Cave / She Shed, built for hobby and recreational use.

Personal retreat away from the house. Game room, music studio, art workshop, lounge, or backyard studio with room to separate activity zones. Fully insulated and pre-wired for HVAC, lighting, and entertainment.

You're viewing:Man Cave / She Shed·Size25×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$12,650$14,400Save $1,750
or as low as $264/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×40
25×40
this size
$12,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From style="margin-top:18px"0,995
  • Insulated
  • Walk-In Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X40-MAN-CAVE-SHE-SHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your finished retreat layout.

25 feet wide × 40 feet long. Plumbing wall placed for bar + bath back-to-back. Personal retreat away from the house.

Main loungeWet bar / kitchenetteBath + storage25′ × 40′ · 1,000 sq ft · finished retreat layout

Main lounge · Wet bar / kitchenette · Bath + storage

Main lounge at the front, wet bar / kitchenette in the middle, bath + storage at the rear. Capacity: entertaining space for 40 guests. Game room, music studio, art workshop, lounge, or backyard studio with room to separate activity zones.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: wet bar, half bath, media wall.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×40 Man Cave / She Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Man Cave / She Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Man Cave / She Shed spec sheet.

Width25'
Length40' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Man Cave / She Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday man cave / she shed
Everyday man cave / she shed
1,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a man cave / she shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWman cave / she shed + seasonal storage
man cave / she shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×40 Man Cave / She Shed — what makes it different.

1,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$264/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×40 man cave / she shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $264/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×40?

1,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 40′ footprint with 1,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,000–$12,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Man Cave / She Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 25×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×40 Man Cave / She Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×40 Man Cave / She Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Man Cave / She Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Man Cave / She Shed also viewed:

🏡 25×40

Metal Garage (3 Cars + Storage)

25×40 metal garage (3 cars + storage) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Garage (3 Cars + Storage) →
🏡 25×40

Workshop / Hobby Space

25×40 workshop / hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →
🏡 25×40

Metal Carport (Open)

25×40 metal carport (open) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Carport (Open) →
🏢 25×40

Commercial Steel Building

25×40 commercial steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Steel Building →
🏡 25×40

RV Cover / Boat Storage

25×40 rv cover / boat storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →
🎯 25×40

Home Gym / Studio

25×40 home gym / studio configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym / Studio →
🌾 25×40

Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

25×40 metal barn (farm & ranch) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) →
🏭 25×40

Factory / Warehouse

25×40 factory / warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Factory / Warehouse →
🏛️ 25×40

Government / Institutional

25×40 government / institutional configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Government / Institutional →
🌾 25×40

Equestrian Arena / Tack Room

25×40 equestrian arena / tack room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equestrian Arena / Tack Room →
🏛️ 25×40

Houses of Worship

25×40 houses of worship configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Houses of Worship →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Man Cave / She Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 25×40 man cave / she shed cost?

A 25×40 man cave / she shed from Steel and Stud starts at $12,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $264/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×40 man cave / she shed price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud man cave / she shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×40 man cave / she shed?

Almost always for 1,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud man cave / she shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×40 man cave / she shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×40 man cave / she shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×40 man cave / she shed without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $264/month on a 25×40 man cave / she shed.

What warranty comes with the 25×40 man cave / she shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×40 man cave / she shed in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 25×40 man cave / she shed for year-round use?

Yes — Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a man cave / she shed to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Man Cave / She Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$12,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

25×40 Equestrian Arena / Tack Room

1,000 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

25′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×40 steel building delivers 1,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
25×40 Equestrian Arena / Tack Room | Steel and Stud — From $13,300
12
25×40 Equestrian Arena / Tack Room
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$15,150$13,300SAVE $1,850
or $277/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings25×40Equestrian Arena / Tack Room
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×40 Equestrian Arena / Tack Room, built for farm and ranch demands.

High roof clearance for mounted riders, reinforced flooring for hooves, oversized roll-up doors. Store tack, hay, feed, and groom horses under one all-steel roof.

You're viewing:Equestrian Arena / Tack Room·Size25×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$13,300$15,150Save $1,850
or as low as $277/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×40
25×40
this size
$13,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Up to 20 Tall
  • Ventilation
  • Heavy Duty
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X40-EQUESTRIAN-ARENABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your arena support building.

25 feet wide × 40 feet long. Dutch door + gable vents for airflow. High roof clearance for mounted riders, reinforced flooring for hooves, oversized roll-up doors.

Tack + saddle wallFEED + SUPPLIESGrooming / cross-tie bay25′ × 40′ · 1,000 sq ft · arena support building

Tack + saddle wall · Feed + supplies · Grooming / cross-tie bay

Tack + saddle wall at the front, feed + supplies in the middle, grooming / cross-tie bay at the rear. Capacity: supports an outdoor arena. Store tack, hay, feed, and groom horses under one all-steel roof.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: saddle racks, wash rough-in.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×40 Equestrian Arena / Tack Room in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equestrian Arena / Tack Room.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equestrian Arena / Tack Room spec sheet.

Width25'
Length40' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equestrian Arena / Tack Room.

DAILY USEEveryday equestrian arena / tack room
Everyday equestrian arena / tack room
1,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equestrian arena / tack room.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequestrian arena / tack room + seasonal storage
equestrian arena / tack room + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×40 Equestrian Arena / Tack Room — what makes it different.

1,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$277/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×40 equestrian arena / tack room is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $277/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×40?

1,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 40′ footprint with 1,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,000–$12,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equestrian Arena / Tack Room shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 25×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×40 Equestrian Arena / Tack Room buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×40 Equestrian Arena / Tack Room

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Equestrian Arena / Tack Room · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equestrian Arena / Tack Room also viewed:

🏡 25×40

Metal Garage (3 Cars + Storage)

25×40 metal garage (3 cars + storage) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Garage (3 Cars + Storage) →
🏡 25×40

Workshop / Hobby Space

25×40 workshop / hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →
🏡 25×40

Metal Carport (Open)

25×40 metal carport (open) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Carport (Open) →
🏢 25×40

Commercial Steel Building

25×40 commercial steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Steel Building →
🏡 25×40

RV Cover / Boat Storage

25×40 rv cover / boat storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →
🎯 25×40

Home Gym / Studio

25×40 home gym / studio configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym / Studio →
🌾 25×40

Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

25×40 metal barn (farm & ranch) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) →
🎯 25×40

Man Cave / She Shed

25×40 man cave / she shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave / She Shed →
🏭 25×40

Factory / Warehouse

25×40 factory / warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Factory / Warehouse →
🏛️ 25×40

Government / Institutional

25×40 government / institutional configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Government / Institutional →
🏛️ 25×40

Houses of Worship

25×40 houses of worship configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Houses of Worship →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equestrian Arena / Tack Room questions, answered.

How much does a 25×40 equestrian arena / tack room cost?

A 25×40 equestrian arena / tack room from Steel and Stud starts at $13,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $277/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×40 equestrian arena / tack room price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud equestrian arena / tack room ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×40 equestrian arena / tack room?

Almost always for 1,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equestrian arena / tack room different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×40 equestrian arena / tack room need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×40 equestrian arena / tack room delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×40 equestrian arena / tack room without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $277/month on a 25×40 equestrian arena / tack room.

What warranty comes with the 25×40 equestrian arena / tack room?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×40 equestrian arena / tack room in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 25×40 equestrian arena / tack room stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Equestrian Arena / Tack Room quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$13,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

25×40 Equestrian Arena / Tack Room

1,000 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

25′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×40 steel building delivers 1,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
25×40 Equestrian Arena / Tack Room | Steel and Stud — From $13,300
12
25×40 Equestrian Arena / Tack Room
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$15,150$13,300SAVE $1,850
or $277/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings25×40Equestrian Arena / Tack Room
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×40 Equestrian Arena / Tack Room, built for farm and ranch demands.

High roof clearance for mounted riders, reinforced flooring for hooves, oversized roll-up doors. Store tack, hay, feed, and groom horses under one all-steel roof.

You're viewing:Equestrian Arena / Tack Room·Size25×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$13,300$15,150Save $1,850
or as low as $277/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×40
25×40
this size
$13,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Up to 20 Tall
  • Ventilation
  • Heavy Duty
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X40-EQUESTRIAN-ARENABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your arena support building.

25 feet wide × 40 feet long. Dutch door + gable vents for airflow. High roof clearance for mounted riders, reinforced flooring for hooves, oversized roll-up doors.

Tack + saddle wallFEED + SUPPLIESGrooming / cross-tie bay25′ × 40′ · 1,000 sq ft · arena support building

Tack + saddle wall · Feed + supplies · Grooming / cross-tie bay

Tack + saddle wall at the front, feed + supplies in the middle, grooming / cross-tie bay at the rear. Capacity: supports an outdoor arena. Store tack, hay, feed, and groom horses under one all-steel roof.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: saddle racks, wash rough-in.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×40 Equestrian Arena / Tack Room in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equestrian Arena / Tack Room.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equestrian Arena / Tack Room spec sheet.

Width25'
Length40' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equestrian Arena / Tack Room.

DAILY USEEveryday equestrian arena / tack room
Everyday equestrian arena / tack room
1,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equestrian arena / tack room.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequestrian arena / tack room + seasonal storage
equestrian arena / tack room + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×40 Equestrian Arena / Tack Room — what makes it different.

1,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$277/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×40 equestrian arena / tack room is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $277/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×40?

1,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 40′ footprint with 1,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,000–$12,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equestrian Arena / Tack Room shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 25×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×40 Equestrian Arena / Tack Room buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×40 Equestrian Arena / Tack Room

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Equestrian Arena / Tack Room · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equestrian Arena / Tack Room also viewed:

🏡 25×40

Metal Garage (3 Cars + Storage)

25×40 metal garage (3 cars + storage) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Garage (3 Cars + Storage) →
🏡 25×40

Workshop / Hobby Space

25×40 workshop / hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →
🏡 25×40

Metal Carport (Open)

25×40 metal carport (open) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Carport (Open) →
🏢 25×40

Commercial Steel Building

25×40 commercial steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Steel Building →
🏡 25×40

RV Cover / Boat Storage

25×40 rv cover / boat storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →
🎯 25×40

Home Gym / Studio

25×40 home gym / studio configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym / Studio →
🌾 25×40

Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

25×40 metal barn (farm & ranch) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) →
🎯 25×40

Man Cave / She Shed

25×40 man cave / she shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave / She Shed →
🏭 25×40

Factory / Warehouse

25×40 factory / warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Factory / Warehouse →
🏛️ 25×40

Government / Institutional

25×40 government / institutional configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Government / Institutional →
🏛️ 25×40

Houses of Worship

25×40 houses of worship configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Houses of Worship →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equestrian Arena / Tack Room questions, answered.

How much does a 25×40 equestrian arena / tack room cost?

A 25×40 equestrian arena / tack room from Steel and Stud starts at $13,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $277/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×40 equestrian arena / tack room price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud equestrian arena / tack room ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×40 equestrian arena / tack room?

Almost always for 1,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equestrian arena / tack room different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×40 equestrian arena / tack room need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×40 equestrian arena / tack room delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×40 equestrian arena / tack room without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $277/month on a 25×40 equestrian arena / tack room.

What warranty comes with the 25×40 equestrian arena / tack room?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×40 equestrian arena / tack room in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 25×40 equestrian arena / tack room stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Equestrian Arena / Tack Room quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$13,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x70 metal building: side elevation showing height and roof line, 1,400 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×70 Three-Car Detached Garage

1,400 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×70 steel building delivers 1,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×70 Three-Car Detached Garage | Steel and Stud — From $19,200
12
20×70 Three-Car Detached Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$21,900$19,200SAVE $2,700
or $400/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×70Three-Car Detached Garage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×70 Three-Car Detached Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Homeowners on standard suburban lots use the 20×70 as a deep three-car detached garage with a shop bay at the back. You'll fit three full-size trucks bumper-to-bumper or two SUVs plus 25 feet of dedicated workshop. Most.

You're viewing:Three-Car Detached Garage·Size20×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$19,200$21,900Save $2,700
or as low as $400/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×70
20×70
this size
$19,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,400 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • Free Install
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X70-THREE-CAR-DETACHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

20 feet wide × 70 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. Homeowners on standard suburban lots use the 20×70 as a deep three-car detached garage with a shop bay at the back.

2 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay20′ × 70′ · 1,400 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

2 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

2 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 2 vehicles + full hobby shop. You'll fit three full-size trucks bumper-to-bumper or two SUVs plus 25 feet of dedicated workshop.

💡 Pro tip:Free Install. Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×70 Three-Car Detached Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Three-Car Detached Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Three-Car Detached Garage spec sheet.

Width20'
Length70' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Three-Car Detached Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday three-car detached garage
Everyday three-car detached garage
1,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a three-car detached garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWthree-car detached garage + seasonal storage
three-car detached garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×70 Three-Car Detached Garage — what makes it different.

1,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$400/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×70 three-car detached garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $400/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×70?

1,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 70′ footprint with 1,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $11,200–$16,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Three-Car Detached Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×70 Three-Car Detached Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×70 Three-Car Detached Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Three-Car Detached Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×71×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,300+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Three-Car Detached Garage also viewed:

🎯 20×70

RV Cover with Storage

20×70 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🏢 20×70

Contractor Workshop

20×70 contractor workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop →
🌾 20×70

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms

20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms →
🏡 20×70

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×70 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
🏢 20×70

Auto Repair Shop

20×70 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🏡 20×70

Barndominium Shell

20×70 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🏢 20×70

Side-by-Side Carport

20×70 side-by-side carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Side-by-Side Carport →
🌾 20×70

Horse Run-In Shed

20×70 horse run-in shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In Shed →
🎯 20×70

Hangar-Style Hobby Shop

20×70 hangar-style hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hangar-Style Hobby Shop →
🏭 20×70

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

20×70 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 20×70

Community / Fire-Rescue Storage

20×70 community / fire-rescue storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Fire-Rescue Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Three-Car Detached Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×70 three-car detached garage cost?

A 20×70 three-car detached garage from Steel and Stud starts at $19,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $400/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×70 three-car detached garage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud three-car detached garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×70 three-car detached garage?

Almost always for 1,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud three-car detached garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×70 three-car detached garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×70 three-car detached garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×70 three-car detached garage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $400/month on a 20×70 three-car detached garage.

What warranty comes with the 20×70 three-car detached garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×70 three-car detached garage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×70 three-car detached garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×70 three-car detached garage typically adds $11,200–$16,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Three-Car Detached Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$19,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x70 metal building: side elevation showing height and roof line, 1,400 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×70 Three-Car Detached Garage

1,400 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×70 steel building delivers 1,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×70 Three-Car Detached Garage | Steel and Stud — From $19,200
12
20×70 Three-Car Detached Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$21,900$19,200SAVE $2,700
or $400/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×70Three-Car Detached Garage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×70 Three-Car Detached Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Homeowners on standard suburban lots use the 20×70 as a deep three-car detached garage with a shop bay at the back. You'll fit three full-size trucks bumper-to-bumper or two SUVs plus 25 feet of dedicated workshop. Most.

You're viewing:Three-Car Detached Garage·Size20×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$19,200$21,900Save $2,700
or as low as $400/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×70
20×70
this size
$19,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,400 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • Free Install
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X70-THREE-CAR-DETACHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

20 feet wide × 70 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. Homeowners on standard suburban lots use the 20×70 as a deep three-car detached garage with a shop bay at the back.

2 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay20′ × 70′ · 1,400 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

2 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

2 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 2 vehicles + full hobby shop. You'll fit three full-size trucks bumper-to-bumper or two SUVs plus 25 feet of dedicated workshop.

💡 Pro tip:Free Install. Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×70 Three-Car Detached Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Three-Car Detached Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Three-Car Detached Garage spec sheet.

Width20'
Length70' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Three-Car Detached Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday three-car detached garage
Everyday three-car detached garage
1,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a three-car detached garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWthree-car detached garage + seasonal storage
three-car detached garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×70 Three-Car Detached Garage — what makes it different.

1,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$400/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×70 three-car detached garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $400/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×70?

1,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 70′ footprint with 1,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $11,200–$16,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Three-Car Detached Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×70 Three-Car Detached Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×70 Three-Car Detached Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Three-Car Detached Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×71×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,300+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Three-Car Detached Garage also viewed:

🎯 20×70

RV Cover with Storage

20×70 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🏢 20×70

Contractor Workshop

20×70 contractor workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop →
🌾 20×70

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms

20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms →
🏡 20×70

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×70 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
🏢 20×70

Auto Repair Shop

20×70 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🏡 20×70

Barndominium Shell

20×70 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🏢 20×70

Side-by-Side Carport

20×70 side-by-side carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Side-by-Side Carport →
🌾 20×70

Horse Run-In Shed

20×70 horse run-in shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In Shed →
🎯 20×70

Hangar-Style Hobby Shop

20×70 hangar-style hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hangar-Style Hobby Shop →
🏭 20×70

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

20×70 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 20×70

Community / Fire-Rescue Storage

20×70 community / fire-rescue storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Fire-Rescue Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Three-Car Detached Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×70 three-car detached garage cost?

A 20×70 three-car detached garage from Steel and Stud starts at $19,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $400/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×70 three-car detached garage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud three-car detached garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×70 three-car detached garage?

Almost always for 1,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud three-car detached garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×70 three-car detached garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×70 three-car detached garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×70 three-car detached garage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $400/month on a 20×70 three-car detached garage.

What warranty comes with the 20×70 three-car detached garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×70 three-car detached garage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×70 three-car detached garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×70 three-car detached garage typically adds $11,200–$16,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Three-Car Detached Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$19,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x70 metal building: side elevation showing height and roof line, 1,400 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×70 RV Cover with Storage

1,400 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×70 steel building delivers 1,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×70 RV Cover with Storage | Steel and Stud — From $19,200
12
20×70 RV Cover with Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$21,900$19,200SAVE $2,700
or $400/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×70RV Cover with Storage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×70 RV Cover with Storage, built for hobby and recreational use.

RV owners with Class A motorhomes (typically 35-40 ft) park inside the front 45 feet and use the back 25 feet as locked storage for tools, kayaks, or a side-by-side. The 14-foot eave clears slide-outs and roof AC units.

You're viewing:RV Cover with Storage·Size20×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$19,200$21,900Save $2,700
or as low as $400/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×70
20×70
this size
$19,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,400 sq ft enclosed
  • 14' Eave Clearance
  • 12x12 Roll-Up
  • Fully Enclosed
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X70-RV-COVER-STORAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your RV-cover layout.

20 feet wide × 70 feet long. 14-ft sidewalls fit slide-outs deployed. RV owners with Class A motorhomes (typically 35-40 ft) park inside the front 45 feet and use the back 25 feet as locked storage for tools, kayaks, or a side-by-side.

RV BAYDaily driverHookup / pre-wire20′ × 70′ · 1,400 sq ft · RV-cover layout

RV bay · Daily driver · Hookup / pre-wire

RV bay at the front, daily driver in the middle, hookup / pre-wire at the rear. Capacity: 1 Class A up to 45ft + 1 daily driver. The 14-foot eave clears slide-outs and roof AC units.

💡 Pro tip:14' Eave Clearance. Size affords: 50A hookup, sewer dump, overhead lighting.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×70 RV Cover with Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV Cover with Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV Cover with Storage spec sheet.

Width20'
Length70' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV Cover with Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday rv cover with storage
Everyday rv cover with storage
1,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv cover with storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv cover with storage + seasonal storage
rv cover with storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×70 RV Cover with Storage — what makes it different.

1,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$400/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×70 rv cover with storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $400/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×70?

1,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 70′ footprint with 1,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $11,200–$16,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV Cover with Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×70 RV Cover with Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×70 RV Cover with Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your RV Cover with Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×71×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,300+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV Cover with Storage also viewed:

🏡 20×70

Three-Car Detached Garage

20×70 three-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Detached Garage →
🏢 20×70

Contractor Workshop

20×70 contractor workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop →
🌾 20×70

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms

20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms →
🏡 20×70

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×70 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
🏢 20×70

Auto Repair Shop

20×70 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🏡 20×70

Barndominium Shell

20×70 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🏢 20×70

Side-by-Side Carport

20×70 side-by-side carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Side-by-Side Carport →
🌾 20×70

Horse Run-In Shed

20×70 horse run-in shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In Shed →
🎯 20×70

Hangar-Style Hobby Shop

20×70 hangar-style hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hangar-Style Hobby Shop →
🏭 20×70

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

20×70 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 20×70

Community / Fire-Rescue Storage

20×70 community / fire-rescue storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Fire-Rescue Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV Cover with Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×70 rv cover with storage cost?

A 20×70 rv cover with storage from Steel and Stud starts at $19,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $400/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×70 rv cover with storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud rv cover with storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×70 rv cover with storage?

Almost always for 1,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv cover with storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×70 rv cover with storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×70 rv cover with storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×70 rv cover with storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $400/month on a 20×70 rv cover with storage.

What warranty comes with the 20×70 rv cover with storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×70 rv cover with storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 20×70 rv cover with storage for year-round use?

Yes — Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a rv cover with storage to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your RV Cover with Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$19,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x70 metal building: side elevation showing height and roof line, 1,400 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×70 RV Cover with Storage

1,400 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×70 steel building delivers 1,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×70 RV Cover with Storage | Steel and Stud — From $19,200
12
20×70 RV Cover with Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$21,900$19,200SAVE $2,700
or $400/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×70RV Cover with Storage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×70 RV Cover with Storage, built for hobby and recreational use.

RV owners with Class A motorhomes (typically 35-40 ft) park inside the front 45 feet and use the back 25 feet as locked storage for tools, kayaks, or a side-by-side. The 14-foot eave clears slide-outs and roof AC units.

You're viewing:RV Cover with Storage·Size20×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$19,200$21,900Save $2,700
or as low as $400/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×70
20×70
this size
$19,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,400 sq ft enclosed
  • 14' Eave Clearance
  • 12x12 Roll-Up
  • Fully Enclosed
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X70-RV-COVER-STORAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your RV-cover layout.

20 feet wide × 70 feet long. 14-ft sidewalls fit slide-outs deployed. RV owners with Class A motorhomes (typically 35-40 ft) park inside the front 45 feet and use the back 25 feet as locked storage for tools, kayaks, or a side-by-side.

RV BAYDaily driverHookup / pre-wire20′ × 70′ · 1,400 sq ft · RV-cover layout

RV bay · Daily driver · Hookup / pre-wire

RV bay at the front, daily driver in the middle, hookup / pre-wire at the rear. Capacity: 1 Class A up to 45ft + 1 daily driver. The 14-foot eave clears slide-outs and roof AC units.

💡 Pro tip:14' Eave Clearance. Size affords: 50A hookup, sewer dump, overhead lighting.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×70 RV Cover with Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV Cover with Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV Cover with Storage spec sheet.

Width20'
Length70' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV Cover with Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday rv cover with storage
Everyday rv cover with storage
1,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv cover with storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv cover with storage + seasonal storage
rv cover with storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×70 RV Cover with Storage — what makes it different.

1,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$400/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×70 rv cover with storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $400/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×70?

1,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 70′ footprint with 1,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $11,200–$16,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV Cover with Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×70 RV Cover with Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×70 RV Cover with Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your RV Cover with Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×71×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,300+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV Cover with Storage also viewed:

🏡 20×70

Three-Car Detached Garage

20×70 three-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Detached Garage →
🏢 20×70

Contractor Workshop

20×70 contractor workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop →
🌾 20×70

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms

20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms →
🏡 20×70

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×70 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
🏢 20×70

Auto Repair Shop

20×70 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🏡 20×70

Barndominium Shell

20×70 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🏢 20×70

Side-by-Side Carport

20×70 side-by-side carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Side-by-Side Carport →
🌾 20×70

Horse Run-In Shed

20×70 horse run-in shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In Shed →
🎯 20×70

Hangar-Style Hobby Shop

20×70 hangar-style hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hangar-Style Hobby Shop →
🏭 20×70

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

20×70 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 20×70

Community / Fire-Rescue Storage

20×70 community / fire-rescue storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Fire-Rescue Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV Cover with Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×70 rv cover with storage cost?

A 20×70 rv cover with storage from Steel and Stud starts at $19,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $400/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×70 rv cover with storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud rv cover with storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×70 rv cover with storage?

Almost always for 1,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv cover with storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×70 rv cover with storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×70 rv cover with storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×70 rv cover with storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $400/month on a 20×70 rv cover with storage.

What warranty comes with the 20×70 rv cover with storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×70 rv cover with storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 20×70 rv cover with storage for year-round use?

Yes — Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a rv cover with storage to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your RV Cover with Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$19,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x70 metal building: side elevation showing height and roof line, 1,400 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×70 Contractor Workshop

1,400 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×70 steel building delivers 1,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×70 Contractor Workshop | Steel and Stud — From $21,050
12
20×70 Contractor Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$24,000$21,050SAVE $2,950
or $439/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×70Contractor Workshop
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×70 Contractor Workshop, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Tradespeople running solo or two-man crews spec the 20×70 as a working shop — truck bay up front, fabrication zone in the middle, materials storage at the back. 1,400 sq ft holds a service truck plus a full miter saw.

You're viewing:Contractor Workshop·Size20×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$21,050$24,000Save $2,950
or as low as $439/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×70
20×70
this size
$21,050
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,400 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Upgrade
  • Walk-In Door
  • R-19 Insulation
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X70-CONTRACTOR-WORKSBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your workshop layout.

20 feet wide × 70 feet long. Side-load + walk-in, dust-collection ready. Tradespeople running solo or two-man crews spec the 20×70 as a working shop — truck bay up front, fabrication zone in the middle, materials storage at the back.

Workbench wallTABLE SAW / CENTERLumber / Material rack20′ × 70′ · 1,400 sq ft · workshop layout

Workbench wall · Table saw / Center · Lumber / Material rack

Workbench wall at the front, table saw / center in the middle, lumber / material rack at the rear. Capacity: 1-person serious shop. 1,400 sq ft holds a service truck plus a full miter saw station, two workbenches, and pallet racking.

💡 Pro tip:R-19 Insulation. Size affords: dust collection, 220V subpanel, shop sink.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×70 Contractor Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Contractor Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contractor Workshop spec sheet.

Width20'
Length70' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Contractor Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday contractor workshop
Everyday contractor workshop
1,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a contractor workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcontractor workshop + seasonal storage
contractor workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×70 Contractor Workshop — what makes it different.

1,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$439/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×70 contractor workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $439/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×70?

1,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 70′ footprint with 1,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $11,200–$16,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Contractor Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×70 Contractor Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×70 Contractor Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Contractor Workshop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×71×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,300+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Contractor Workshop also viewed:

🏡 20×70

Three-Car Detached Garage

20×70 three-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Detached Garage →
🎯 20×70

RV Cover with Storage

20×70 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🌾 20×70

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms

20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms →
🏡 20×70

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×70 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
🏢 20×70

Auto Repair Shop

20×70 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🏡 20×70

Barndominium Shell

20×70 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🏢 20×70

Side-by-Side Carport

20×70 side-by-side carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Side-by-Side Carport →
🌾 20×70

Horse Run-In Shed

20×70 horse run-in shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In Shed →
🎯 20×70

Hangar-Style Hobby Shop

20×70 hangar-style hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hangar-Style Hobby Shop →
🏭 20×70

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

20×70 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 20×70

Community / Fire-Rescue Storage

20×70 community / fire-rescue storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Fire-Rescue Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Contractor Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 20×70 contractor workshop cost?

A 20×70 contractor workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $21,050 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $439/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×70 contractor workshop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud contractor workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×70 contractor workshop?

Almost always for 1,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud contractor workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×70 contractor workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×70 contractor workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×70 contractor workshop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $439/month on a 20×70 contractor workshop.

What warranty comes with the 20×70 contractor workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×70 contractor workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 20×70 contractor workshop meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Contractor Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$21,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x70 metal building: side elevation showing height and roof line, 1,400 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×70 Contractor Workshop

1,400 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×70 steel building delivers 1,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×70 Contractor Workshop | Steel and Stud — From $21,050
12
20×70 Contractor Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$24,000$21,050SAVE $2,950
or $439/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×70Contractor Workshop
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×70 Contractor Workshop, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Tradespeople running solo or two-man crews spec the 20×70 as a working shop — truck bay up front, fabrication zone in the middle, materials storage at the back. 1,400 sq ft holds a service truck plus a full miter saw.

You're viewing:Contractor Workshop·Size20×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$21,050$24,000Save $2,950
or as low as $439/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×70
20×70
this size
$21,050
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,400 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Upgrade
  • Walk-In Door
  • R-19 Insulation
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X70-CONTRACTOR-WORKSBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your workshop layout.

20 feet wide × 70 feet long. Side-load + walk-in, dust-collection ready. Tradespeople running solo or two-man crews spec the 20×70 as a working shop — truck bay up front, fabrication zone in the middle, materials storage at the back.

Workbench wallTABLE SAW / CENTERLumber / Material rack20′ × 70′ · 1,400 sq ft · workshop layout

Workbench wall · Table saw / Center · Lumber / Material rack

Workbench wall at the front, table saw / center in the middle, lumber / material rack at the rear. Capacity: 1-person serious shop. 1,400 sq ft holds a service truck plus a full miter saw station, two workbenches, and pallet racking.

💡 Pro tip:R-19 Insulation. Size affords: dust collection, 220V subpanel, shop sink.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×70 Contractor Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Contractor Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contractor Workshop spec sheet.

Width20'
Length70' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Contractor Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday contractor workshop
Everyday contractor workshop
1,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a contractor workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcontractor workshop + seasonal storage
contractor workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×70 Contractor Workshop — what makes it different.

1,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$439/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×70 contractor workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $439/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×70?

1,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 70′ footprint with 1,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $11,200–$16,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Contractor Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×70 Contractor Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×70 Contractor Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Contractor Workshop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×71×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,300+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Contractor Workshop also viewed:

🏡 20×70

Three-Car Detached Garage

20×70 three-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Detached Garage →
🎯 20×70

RV Cover with Storage

20×70 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🌾 20×70

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms

20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms →
🏡 20×70

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×70 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
🏢 20×70

Auto Repair Shop

20×70 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🏡 20×70

Barndominium Shell

20×70 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🏢 20×70

Side-by-Side Carport

20×70 side-by-side carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Side-by-Side Carport →
🌾 20×70

Horse Run-In Shed

20×70 horse run-in shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In Shed →
🎯 20×70

Hangar-Style Hobby Shop

20×70 hangar-style hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hangar-Style Hobby Shop →
🏭 20×70

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

20×70 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 20×70

Community / Fire-Rescue Storage

20×70 community / fire-rescue storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Fire-Rescue Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Contractor Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 20×70 contractor workshop cost?

A 20×70 contractor workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $21,050 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $439/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×70 contractor workshop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud contractor workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×70 contractor workshop?

Almost always for 1,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud contractor workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×70 contractor workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×70 contractor workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×70 contractor workshop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $439/month on a 20×70 contractor workshop.

What warranty comes with the 20×70 contractor workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×70 contractor workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 20×70 contractor workshop meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Contractor Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$21,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x70 metal building: side elevation showing height and roof line, 1,400 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×70 Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms

1,400 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×70 steel building delivers 1,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×70 Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms | Steel and Stud — From $19,850
12
20×70 Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$22,650$19,850SAVE $2,800
or $414/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×70Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×70 Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms, built for farm and ranch demands.

Hobby farmers shelter a compact tractor with implements, a UTV, and round bales under one roof. Open both gable ends for drive-through access, or enclose three sides and leave one long side open. A 12-foot eave clears.

You're viewing:Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms·Size20×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$19,850$22,650Save $2,800
or as low as $414/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×70
20×70
this size
$19,850
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,400 sq ft enclosed
  • Open Gables
  • Drive-Through Layout
  • 29 GA Panels
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X70-EQUIPMENT-SHED-HBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your equipment-barn layout.

20 feet wide × 70 feet long. 12-ft doors clear a cab tractor with ROPS up. Hobby farmers shelter a compact tractor with implements, a UTV, and round bales under one roof.

1 drive-in baysImplement + attachment rowsWorkbench + parts wall20′ × 70′ · 1,400 sq ft · equipment-barn layout

1 drive-in bays · Implement + attachment rows · Workbench + parts wall

1 drive-in bays at the front, implement + attachment rows in the middle, workbench + parts wall at the rear. Capacity: 1 machines under roof. Open both gable ends for drive-through access, or enclose three sides and leave one long side open.

💡 Pro tip:Drive-Through Layout. Size affords: drive-through bay, welding corner, bulk-fluid rack.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×70 Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms spec sheet.

Width20'
Length70' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms.

DAILY USEEveryday equipment shed for hobby farms
Everyday equipment shed for hobby farms
1,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equipment shed for hobby farms.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequipment shed for hobby farms + seasonal storage
equipment shed for hobby farms + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×70 Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms — what makes it different.

1,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$414/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $414/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×70?

1,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 70′ footprint with 1,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $11,200–$16,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×70 Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×70 Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×71×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,300+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms also viewed:

🏡 20×70

Three-Car Detached Garage

20×70 three-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Detached Garage →
🎯 20×70

RV Cover with Storage

20×70 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🏢 20×70

Contractor Workshop

20×70 contractor workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop →
🏡 20×70

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×70 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
🏢 20×70

Auto Repair Shop

20×70 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🏡 20×70

Barndominium Shell

20×70 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🏢 20×70

Side-by-Side Carport

20×70 side-by-side carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Side-by-Side Carport →
🌾 20×70

Horse Run-In Shed

20×70 horse run-in shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In Shed →
🎯 20×70

Hangar-Style Hobby Shop

20×70 hangar-style hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hangar-Style Hobby Shop →
🏭 20×70

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

20×70 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 20×70

Community / Fire-Rescue Storage

20×70 community / fire-rescue storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Fire-Rescue Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms questions, answered.

How much does a 20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms cost?

A 20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms from Steel and Stud starts at $19,850 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $414/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud equipment shed for hobby farms ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms?

Almost always for 1,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equipment shed for hobby farms different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $414/month on a 20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms.

What warranty comes with the 20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$19,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x70 metal building: side elevation showing height and roof line, 1,400 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×70 Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms

1,400 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×70 steel building delivers 1,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×70 Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms | Steel and Stud — From $19,850
12
20×70 Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$22,650$19,850SAVE $2,800
or $414/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×70Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×70 Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms, built for farm and ranch demands.

Hobby farmers shelter a compact tractor with implements, a UTV, and round bales under one roof. Open both gable ends for drive-through access, or enclose three sides and leave one long side open. A 12-foot eave clears.

You're viewing:Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms·Size20×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$19,850$22,650Save $2,800
or as low as $414/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×70
20×70
this size
$19,850
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,400 sq ft enclosed
  • Open Gables
  • Drive-Through Layout
  • 29 GA Panels
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X70-EQUIPMENT-SHED-HBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your equipment-barn layout.

20 feet wide × 70 feet long. 12-ft doors clear a cab tractor with ROPS up. Hobby farmers shelter a compact tractor with implements, a UTV, and round bales under one roof.

1 drive-in baysImplement + attachment rowsWorkbench + parts wall20′ × 70′ · 1,400 sq ft · equipment-barn layout

1 drive-in bays · Implement + attachment rows · Workbench + parts wall

1 drive-in bays at the front, implement + attachment rows in the middle, workbench + parts wall at the rear. Capacity: 1 machines under roof. Open both gable ends for drive-through access, or enclose three sides and leave one long side open.

💡 Pro tip:Drive-Through Layout. Size affords: drive-through bay, welding corner, bulk-fluid rack.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×70 Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms spec sheet.

Width20'
Length70' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms.

DAILY USEEveryday equipment shed for hobby farms
Everyday equipment shed for hobby farms
1,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equipment shed for hobby farms.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequipment shed for hobby farms + seasonal storage
equipment shed for hobby farms + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×70 Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms — what makes it different.

1,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$414/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $414/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×70?

1,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 70′ footprint with 1,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $11,200–$16,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×70 Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×70 Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×71×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,300+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms also viewed:

🏡 20×70

Three-Car Detached Garage

20×70 three-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Detached Garage →
🎯 20×70

RV Cover with Storage

20×70 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🏢 20×70

Contractor Workshop

20×70 contractor workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop →
🏡 20×70

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×70 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
🏢 20×70

Auto Repair Shop

20×70 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🏡 20×70

Barndominium Shell

20×70 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🏢 20×70

Side-by-Side Carport

20×70 side-by-side carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Side-by-Side Carport →
🌾 20×70

Horse Run-In Shed

20×70 horse run-in shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In Shed →
🎯 20×70

Hangar-Style Hobby Shop

20×70 hangar-style hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hangar-Style Hobby Shop →
🏭 20×70

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

20×70 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 20×70

Community / Fire-Rescue Storage

20×70 community / fire-rescue storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Fire-Rescue Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms questions, answered.

How much does a 20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms cost?

A 20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms from Steel and Stud starts at $19,850 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $414/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud equipment shed for hobby farms ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms?

Almost always for 1,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equipment shed for hobby farms different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $414/month on a 20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms.

What warranty comes with the 20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$19,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x70 metal building: side elevation showing height and roof line, 1,400 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×70 Boat & Trailer Storage

1,400 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×70 steel building delivers 1,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×70 Boat & Trailer Storage | Steel and Stud — From $19,200
12
20×70 Boat & Trailer Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$21,900$19,200SAVE $2,700
or $400/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×70Boat & Trailer Storage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×70 Boat & Trailer Storage, built for daily backyard use.

Lake-property owners back a wake boat on a tandem trailer (typically 28-32 ft) into the front, with the rear half holding a fishing boat, jet skis, or seasonal gear. A 12-foot eave clears most tower boats with the.

You're viewing:Boat & Trailer Storage·Size20×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$19,200$21,900Save $2,700
or as low as $400/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×70
20×70
this size
$19,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,400 sq ft enclosed
  • Sliding Barn Door
  • 12' Eave
  • Coastal Wind Pkg
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X70-BOAT-TRAILER-STOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your boat-storage layout.

20 feet wide × 70 feet long. 12-ft doors take a pontoon on bunks. Lake-property owners back a wake boat on a tandem trailer (typically 28-32 ft) into the front, with the rear half holding a fishing boat, jet skis, or seasonal gear.

Boat + trailer baySecond toy / daily driverRinse + gear zone20′ × 70′ · 1,400 sq ft · boat-storage layout

Boat + trailer bay · Second toy / daily driver · Rinse + gear zone

Boat + trailer bay at the front, second toy / daily driver in the middle, rinse + gear zone at the rear. Capacity: 1 boat to 40ft + a second toy. A 12-foot eave clears most tower boats with the bimini up.

💡 Pro tip:Coastal Wind Pkg. Size affords: rinse-down bay, overhead rod racks, winch point.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×70 Boat & Trailer Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Boat & Trailer Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Boat & Trailer Storage spec sheet.

Width20'
Length70' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Boat & Trailer Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday boat & trailer storage
Everyday boat & trailer storage
1,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a boat & trailer storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWboat & trailer storage + seasonal storage
boat & trailer storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×70 Boat & Trailer Storage — what makes it different.

1,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$400/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×70 boat & trailer storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $400/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×70?

1,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 70′ footprint with 1,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $11,200–$16,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Boat & Trailer Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×70 Boat & Trailer Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×70 Boat & Trailer Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Boat & Trailer Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×71×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,300+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Boat & Trailer Storage also viewed:

🏡 20×70

Three-Car Detached Garage

20×70 three-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Detached Garage →
🎯 20×70

RV Cover with Storage

20×70 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🏢 20×70

Contractor Workshop

20×70 contractor workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop →
🌾 20×70

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms

20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms →
🏢 20×70

Auto Repair Shop

20×70 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🏡 20×70

Barndominium Shell

20×70 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🏢 20×70

Side-by-Side Carport

20×70 side-by-side carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Side-by-Side Carport →
🌾 20×70

Horse Run-In Shed

20×70 horse run-in shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In Shed →
🎯 20×70

Hangar-Style Hobby Shop

20×70 hangar-style hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hangar-Style Hobby Shop →
🏭 20×70

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

20×70 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 20×70

Community / Fire-Rescue Storage

20×70 community / fire-rescue storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Fire-Rescue Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Boat & Trailer Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×70 boat & trailer storage cost?

A 20×70 boat & trailer storage from Steel and Stud starts at $19,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $400/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×70 boat & trailer storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud boat & trailer storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×70 boat & trailer storage?

Almost always for 1,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud boat & trailer storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×70 boat & trailer storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×70 boat & trailer storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×70 boat & trailer storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $400/month on a 20×70 boat & trailer storage.

What warranty comes with the 20×70 boat & trailer storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×70 boat & trailer storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×70 boat & trailer storage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×70 boat & trailer storage typically adds $11,200–$16,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Boat & Trailer Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$19,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x70 metal building: side elevation showing height and roof line, 1,400 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×70 Boat & Trailer Storage

1,400 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×70 steel building delivers 1,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×70 Boat & Trailer Storage | Steel and Stud — From $19,200
12
20×70 Boat & Trailer Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$21,900$19,200SAVE $2,700
or $400/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×70Boat & Trailer Storage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×70 Boat & Trailer Storage, built for daily backyard use.

Lake-property owners back a wake boat on a tandem trailer (typically 28-32 ft) into the front, with the rear half holding a fishing boat, jet skis, or seasonal gear. A 12-foot eave clears most tower boats with the.

You're viewing:Boat & Trailer Storage·Size20×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$19,200$21,900Save $2,700
or as low as $400/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×70
20×70
this size
$19,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,400 sq ft enclosed
  • Sliding Barn Door
  • 12' Eave
  • Coastal Wind Pkg
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X70-BOAT-TRAILER-STOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your boat-storage layout.

20 feet wide × 70 feet long. 12-ft doors take a pontoon on bunks. Lake-property owners back a wake boat on a tandem trailer (typically 28-32 ft) into the front, with the rear half holding a fishing boat, jet skis, or seasonal gear.

Boat + trailer baySecond toy / daily driverRinse + gear zone20′ × 70′ · 1,400 sq ft · boat-storage layout

Boat + trailer bay · Second toy / daily driver · Rinse + gear zone

Boat + trailer bay at the front, second toy / daily driver in the middle, rinse + gear zone at the rear. Capacity: 1 boat to 40ft + a second toy. A 12-foot eave clears most tower boats with the bimini up.

💡 Pro tip:Coastal Wind Pkg. Size affords: rinse-down bay, overhead rod racks, winch point.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×70 Boat & Trailer Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Boat & Trailer Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Boat & Trailer Storage spec sheet.

Width20'
Length70' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Boat & Trailer Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday boat & trailer storage
Everyday boat & trailer storage
1,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a boat & trailer storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWboat & trailer storage + seasonal storage
boat & trailer storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×70 Boat & Trailer Storage — what makes it different.

1,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$400/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×70 boat & trailer storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $400/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×70?

1,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 70′ footprint with 1,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $11,200–$16,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Boat & Trailer Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×70 Boat & Trailer Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×70 Boat & Trailer Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Boat & Trailer Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×71×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,300+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Boat & Trailer Storage also viewed:

🏡 20×70

Three-Car Detached Garage

20×70 three-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Detached Garage →
🎯 20×70

RV Cover with Storage

20×70 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🏢 20×70

Contractor Workshop

20×70 contractor workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop →
🌾 20×70

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms

20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms →
🏢 20×70

Auto Repair Shop

20×70 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🏡 20×70

Barndominium Shell

20×70 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🏢 20×70

Side-by-Side Carport

20×70 side-by-side carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Side-by-Side Carport →
🌾 20×70

Horse Run-In Shed

20×70 horse run-in shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In Shed →
🎯 20×70

Hangar-Style Hobby Shop

20×70 hangar-style hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hangar-Style Hobby Shop →
🏭 20×70

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

20×70 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 20×70

Community / Fire-Rescue Storage

20×70 community / fire-rescue storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Fire-Rescue Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Boat & Trailer Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×70 boat & trailer storage cost?

A 20×70 boat & trailer storage from Steel and Stud starts at $19,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $400/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×70 boat & trailer storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud boat & trailer storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×70 boat & trailer storage?

Almost always for 1,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud boat & trailer storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×70 boat & trailer storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×70 boat & trailer storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×70 boat & trailer storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $400/month on a 20×70 boat & trailer storage.

What warranty comes with the 20×70 boat & trailer storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×70 boat & trailer storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×70 boat & trailer storage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×70 boat & trailer storage typically adds $11,200–$16,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Boat & Trailer Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$19,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x70 metal building: side elevation showing height and roof line, 1,400 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×70 Auto Repair Shop

1,400 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×70 steel building delivers 1,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×70 Auto Repair Shop | Steel and Stud — From $21,050
12
20×70 Auto Repair Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$24,000$21,050SAVE $2,950
or $439/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×70Auto Repair Shop
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×70 Auto Repair Shop, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Independent mechanics fit two drive-on lifts plus a tire-mount station inside 1,400 sq ft. 12-foot eaves clear most two-post lifts with a full-size truck raised. The 70-foot length lets you stage one vehicle waiting.

You're viewing:Auto Repair Shop·Size20×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$21,050$24,000Save $2,950
or as low as $439/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×70
20×70
this size
$21,050
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,400 sq ft enclosed
  • 12' Lift Clearance
  • Pre-Framed Opening
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X70-AUTO-REPAIR-SHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay service shop.

20 feet wide × 70 feet long. 14-ft eaves clear a 9,000-lb lift at full rise. Independent mechanics fit two drive-on lifts plus a tire-mount station inside 1,400 sq ft.

1 lift baysALIGNMENT / FLAT BAYParts + customer counter20′ × 70′ · 1,400 sq ft · multi-bay service shop

1 lift bays · Alignment / flat bay · Parts + customer counter

1 lift bays at the front, alignment / flat bay in the middle, parts + customer counter at the rear. Capacity: 1 lifts + alignment rack. 12-foot eaves clear most two-post lifts with a full-size truck raised.

💡 Pro tip:12' Lift Clearance. Size affords: alignment rack, tire machine + balancer, waiting room.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×70 Auto Repair Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Auto Repair Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Auto Repair Shop spec sheet.

Width20'
Length70' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Auto Repair Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday auto repair shop
Everyday auto repair shop
1,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a auto repair shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWauto repair shop + seasonal storage
auto repair shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×70 Auto Repair Shop — what makes it different.

1,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$439/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×70 auto repair shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $439/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×70?

1,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 70′ footprint with 1,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $11,200–$16,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Auto Repair Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×70 Auto Repair Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×70 Auto Repair Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Auto Repair Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×71×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,300+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Auto Repair Shop also viewed:

🏡 20×70

Three-Car Detached Garage

20×70 three-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Detached Garage →
🎯 20×70

RV Cover with Storage

20×70 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🏢 20×70

Contractor Workshop

20×70 contractor workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop →
🌾 20×70

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms

20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms →
🏡 20×70

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×70 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
🏡 20×70

Barndominium Shell

20×70 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🏢 20×70

Side-by-Side Carport

20×70 side-by-side carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Side-by-Side Carport →
🌾 20×70

Horse Run-In Shed

20×70 horse run-in shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In Shed →
🎯 20×70

Hangar-Style Hobby Shop

20×70 hangar-style hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hangar-Style Hobby Shop →
🏭 20×70

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

20×70 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 20×70

Community / Fire-Rescue Storage

20×70 community / fire-rescue storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Fire-Rescue Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Auto Repair Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 20×70 auto repair shop cost?

A 20×70 auto repair shop from Steel and Stud starts at $21,050 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $439/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×70 auto repair shop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud auto repair shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×70 auto repair shop?

Almost always for 1,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud auto repair shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×70 auto repair shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×70 auto repair shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×70 auto repair shop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $439/month on a 20×70 auto repair shop.

What warranty comes with the 20×70 auto repair shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×70 auto repair shop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 20×70 auto repair shop meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Auto Repair Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$21,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x70 metal building: side elevation showing height and roof line, 1,400 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×70 Auto Repair Shop

1,400 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×70 steel building delivers 1,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×70 Auto Repair Shop | Steel and Stud — From $21,050
12
20×70 Auto Repair Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$24,000$21,050SAVE $2,950
or $439/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×70Auto Repair Shop
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×70 Auto Repair Shop, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Independent mechanics fit two drive-on lifts plus a tire-mount station inside 1,400 sq ft. 12-foot eaves clear most two-post lifts with a full-size truck raised. The 70-foot length lets you stage one vehicle waiting.

You're viewing:Auto Repair Shop·Size20×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$21,050$24,000Save $2,950
or as low as $439/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×70
20×70
this size
$21,050
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,400 sq ft enclosed
  • 12' Lift Clearance
  • Pre-Framed Opening
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X70-AUTO-REPAIR-SHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay service shop.

20 feet wide × 70 feet long. 14-ft eaves clear a 9,000-lb lift at full rise. Independent mechanics fit two drive-on lifts plus a tire-mount station inside 1,400 sq ft.

1 lift baysALIGNMENT / FLAT BAYParts + customer counter20′ × 70′ · 1,400 sq ft · multi-bay service shop

1 lift bays · Alignment / flat bay · Parts + customer counter

1 lift bays at the front, alignment / flat bay in the middle, parts + customer counter at the rear. Capacity: 1 lifts + alignment rack. 12-foot eaves clear most two-post lifts with a full-size truck raised.

💡 Pro tip:12' Lift Clearance. Size affords: alignment rack, tire machine + balancer, waiting room.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×70 Auto Repair Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Auto Repair Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Auto Repair Shop spec sheet.

Width20'
Length70' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Auto Repair Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday auto repair shop
Everyday auto repair shop
1,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a auto repair shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWauto repair shop + seasonal storage
auto repair shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×70 Auto Repair Shop — what makes it different.

1,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$439/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×70 auto repair shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $439/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×70?

1,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 70′ footprint with 1,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $11,200–$16,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Auto Repair Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×70 Auto Repair Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×70 Auto Repair Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Auto Repair Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×71×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,300+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Auto Repair Shop also viewed:

🏡 20×70

Three-Car Detached Garage

20×70 three-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Detached Garage →
🎯 20×70

RV Cover with Storage

20×70 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🏢 20×70

Contractor Workshop

20×70 contractor workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop →
🌾 20×70

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms

20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms →
🏡 20×70

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×70 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
🏡 20×70

Barndominium Shell

20×70 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🏢 20×70

Side-by-Side Carport

20×70 side-by-side carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Side-by-Side Carport →
🌾 20×70

Horse Run-In Shed

20×70 horse run-in shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In Shed →
🎯 20×70

Hangar-Style Hobby Shop

20×70 hangar-style hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hangar-Style Hobby Shop →
🏭 20×70

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

20×70 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 20×70

Community / Fire-Rescue Storage

20×70 community / fire-rescue storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Fire-Rescue Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Auto Repair Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 20×70 auto repair shop cost?

A 20×70 auto repair shop from Steel and Stud starts at $21,050 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $439/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×70 auto repair shop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud auto repair shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×70 auto repair shop?

Almost always for 1,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud auto repair shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×70 auto repair shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×70 auto repair shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×70 auto repair shop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $439/month on a 20×70 auto repair shop.

What warranty comes with the 20×70 auto repair shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×70 auto repair shop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 20×70 auto repair shop meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Auto Repair Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$21,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x70 metal building: side elevation showing height and roof line, 1,400 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×70 Barndominium Shell

1,400 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×70 steel building delivers 1,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×70 Barndominium Shell | Steel and Stud — From $19,200
12
20×70 Barndominium Shell
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$21,900$19,200SAVE $2,700
or $400/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×70Barndominium Shell
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×70 Barndominium Shell, built for daily backyard use.

Rural property owners use the 20×70 as a barndominium shell — 1,400 sq ft is plenty for a 1-bedroom plus open kitchen-living and a finished workshop bay. Buyers pre-frame all door, window, and HVAC openings before.

You're viewing:Barndominium Shell·Size20×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$19,200$21,900Save $2,700
or as low as $400/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×70
20×70
this size
$19,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,400 sq ft enclosed
  • IRC Compliant
  • Pre-Framed Openings
  • R-19 Walls
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X70-BARNDOMINIUM-SHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your barndominium shell.

20 feet wide × 70 feet long. Split layout — living one end, shop the other. Rural property owners use the 20×70 as a barndominium shell — 1,400 sq ft is plenty for a 1-bedroom plus open kitchen-living and a finished workshop bay.

2-bed sleeping wingGreat room + kitchenGarage / shop bay20′ × 70′ · 1,400 sq ft · barndominium shell

2-bed sleeping wing · Great room + kitchen · Garage / shop bay

2-bed sleeping wing at the front, great room + kitchen in the middle, garage / shop bay at the rear. Capacity: 2-bed home + attached shop bay. Buyers pre-frame all door, window, and HVAC openings before shipment, then bring in a residential GC to finish interior.

💡 Pro tip:Pre-Framed Openings. Size affords: shop partition wall, porch framing, spray-foam package.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×70 Barndominium Shell in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Barndominium Shell.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Barndominium Shell spec sheet.

Width20'
Length70' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Barndominium Shell.

DAILY USEEveryday barndominium shell
Everyday barndominium shell
1,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a barndominium shell.
STORAGE OVERFLOWbarndominium shell + seasonal storage
barndominium shell + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×70 Barndominium Shell — what makes it different.

1,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$400/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×70 barndominium shell is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $400/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×70?

1,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 70′ footprint with 1,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $11,200–$16,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Barndominium Shell shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×70 Barndominium Shell buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×70 Barndominium Shell

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Barndominium Shell · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×71×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,300+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Barndominium Shell also viewed:

🏡 20×70

Three-Car Detached Garage

20×70 three-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Detached Garage →
🎯 20×70

RV Cover with Storage

20×70 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🏢 20×70

Contractor Workshop

20×70 contractor workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop →
🌾 20×70

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms

20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms →
🏡 20×70

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×70 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
🏢 20×70

Auto Repair Shop

20×70 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🏢 20×70

Side-by-Side Carport

20×70 side-by-side carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Side-by-Side Carport →
🌾 20×70

Horse Run-In Shed

20×70 horse run-in shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In Shed →
🎯 20×70

Hangar-Style Hobby Shop

20×70 hangar-style hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hangar-Style Hobby Shop →
🏭 20×70

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

20×70 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 20×70

Community / Fire-Rescue Storage

20×70 community / fire-rescue storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Fire-Rescue Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Barndominium Shell questions, answered.

How much does a 20×70 barndominium shell cost?

A 20×70 barndominium shell from Steel and Stud starts at $19,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $400/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×70 barndominium shell price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud barndominium shell ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×70 barndominium shell?

Almost always for 1,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud barndominium shell different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×70 barndominium shell need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×70 barndominium shell delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×70 barndominium shell without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $400/month on a 20×70 barndominium shell.

What warranty comes with the 20×70 barndominium shell?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×70 barndominium shell in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×70 barndominium shell add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×70 barndominium shell typically adds $11,200–$16,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Barndominium Shell quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$19,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x70 metal building: side elevation showing height and roof line, 1,400 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×70 Barndominium Shell

1,400 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×70 steel building delivers 1,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×70 Barndominium Shell | Steel and Stud — From $19,200
12
20×70 Barndominium Shell
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$21,900$19,200SAVE $2,700
or $400/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×70Barndominium Shell
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×70 Barndominium Shell, built for daily backyard use.

Rural property owners use the 20×70 as a barndominium shell — 1,400 sq ft is plenty for a 1-bedroom plus open kitchen-living and a finished workshop bay. Buyers pre-frame all door, window, and HVAC openings before.

You're viewing:Barndominium Shell·Size20×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$19,200$21,900Save $2,700
or as low as $400/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×70
20×70
this size
$19,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,400 sq ft enclosed
  • IRC Compliant
  • Pre-Framed Openings
  • R-19 Walls
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X70-BARNDOMINIUM-SHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your barndominium shell.

20 feet wide × 70 feet long. Split layout — living one end, shop the other. Rural property owners use the 20×70 as a barndominium shell — 1,400 sq ft is plenty for a 1-bedroom plus open kitchen-living and a finished workshop bay.

2-bed sleeping wingGreat room + kitchenGarage / shop bay20′ × 70′ · 1,400 sq ft · barndominium shell

2-bed sleeping wing · Great room + kitchen · Garage / shop bay

2-bed sleeping wing at the front, great room + kitchen in the middle, garage / shop bay at the rear. Capacity: 2-bed home + attached shop bay. Buyers pre-frame all door, window, and HVAC openings before shipment, then bring in a residential GC to finish interior.

💡 Pro tip:Pre-Framed Openings. Size affords: shop partition wall, porch framing, spray-foam package.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×70 Barndominium Shell in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Barndominium Shell.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Barndominium Shell spec sheet.

Width20'
Length70' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Barndominium Shell.

DAILY USEEveryday barndominium shell
Everyday barndominium shell
1,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a barndominium shell.
STORAGE OVERFLOWbarndominium shell + seasonal storage
barndominium shell + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×70 Barndominium Shell — what makes it different.

1,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$400/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×70 barndominium shell is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $400/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×70?

1,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 70′ footprint with 1,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $11,200–$16,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Barndominium Shell shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×70 Barndominium Shell buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×70 Barndominium Shell

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Barndominium Shell · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×71×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,300+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Barndominium Shell also viewed:

🏡 20×70

Three-Car Detached Garage

20×70 three-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Detached Garage →
🎯 20×70

RV Cover with Storage

20×70 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🏢 20×70

Contractor Workshop

20×70 contractor workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop →
🌾 20×70

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms

20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms →
🏡 20×70

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×70 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
🏢 20×70

Auto Repair Shop

20×70 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🏢 20×70

Side-by-Side Carport

20×70 side-by-side carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Side-by-Side Carport →
🌾 20×70

Horse Run-In Shed

20×70 horse run-in shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In Shed →
🎯 20×70

Hangar-Style Hobby Shop

20×70 hangar-style hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hangar-Style Hobby Shop →
🏭 20×70

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

20×70 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 20×70

Community / Fire-Rescue Storage

20×70 community / fire-rescue storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Fire-Rescue Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Barndominium Shell questions, answered.

How much does a 20×70 barndominium shell cost?

A 20×70 barndominium shell from Steel and Stud starts at $19,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $400/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×70 barndominium shell price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud barndominium shell ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×70 barndominium shell?

Almost always for 1,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud barndominium shell different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×70 barndominium shell need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×70 barndominium shell delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×70 barndominium shell without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $400/month on a 20×70 barndominium shell.

What warranty comes with the 20×70 barndominium shell?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×70 barndominium shell in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×70 barndominium shell add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×70 barndominium shell typically adds $11,200–$16,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Barndominium Shell quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$19,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x70 metal building: side elevation showing height and roof line, 1,400 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×70 Side-by-Side Carport

1,400 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×70 steel building delivers 1,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×70 Side-by-Side Carport | Steel and Stud — From $21,050
12
20×70 Side-by-Side Carport
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$24,000$21,050SAVE $2,950
or $439/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×70Side-by-Side Carport
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×70 Side-by-Side Carport, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Apartment owners and small fleet operators use the 20×70 as an open-sided carport covering 6-7 standard vehicles parked perpendicular, or 3 vehicles end-to-end with overhang on both sides. Concrete wedge anchors, all 17.

You're viewing:Side-by-Side Carport·Size20×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$21,050$24,000Save $2,950
or as low as $439/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×70
20×70
this size
$21,050
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,400 sq ft enclosed
  • Open Carport
  • Lowest Price Point
  • Concrete Anchors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X70-SIDE-BY-SIDE-CARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay open cover.

20 feet wide × 70 feet long. Extra-wide certified span with braced legs. Apartment owners and small fleet operators use the 20×70 as an open-sided carport covering 6-7 standard vehicles parked perpendicular, or 3 vehicles end-to-end with overhang on both sides.

2+ vehicle / equipment baysHigh-clearance RV or ag slotPerimeter drainage apron20′ × 70′ · 1,400 sq ft · multi-bay open cover

2+ vehicle / equipment bays · High-clearance RV or ag slot · Perimeter drainage apron

2+ vehicle / equipment bays at the front, high-clearance rv or ag slot in the middle, perimeter drainage apron at the rear. Capacity: 2+ vehicles or mixed RV + equipment. Concrete wedge anchors, all 17 trim colors, no walls — it's the lowest-priced way to cover this footprint.

💡 Pro tip:Open Carport. Size affords: vertical-roof upgrade, enclosed end bay, gutter kit.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×70 Side-by-Side Carport in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Side-by-Side Carport.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Side-by-Side Carport spec sheet.

Width20'
Length70' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Side-by-Side Carport.

DAILY USEEveryday side-by-side carport
Everyday side-by-side carport
1,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a side-by-side carport.
STORAGE OVERFLOWside-by-side carport + seasonal storage
side-by-side carport + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×70 Side-by-Side Carport — what makes it different.

1,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$439/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×70 side-by-side carport is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $439/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×70?

1,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 70′ footprint with 1,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $11,200–$16,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Side-by-Side Carport shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×70 Side-by-Side Carport buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×70 Side-by-Side Carport

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Side-by-Side Carport · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×71×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,300+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Side-by-Side Carport also viewed:

🏡 20×70

Three-Car Detached Garage

20×70 three-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Detached Garage →
🎯 20×70

RV Cover with Storage

20×70 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🏢 20×70

Contractor Workshop

20×70 contractor workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop →
🌾 20×70

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms

20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms →
🏡 20×70

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×70 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
🏢 20×70

Auto Repair Shop

20×70 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🏡 20×70

Barndominium Shell

20×70 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🌾 20×70

Horse Run-In Shed

20×70 horse run-in shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In Shed →
🎯 20×70

Hangar-Style Hobby Shop

20×70 hangar-style hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hangar-Style Hobby Shop →
🏭 20×70

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

20×70 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 20×70

Community / Fire-Rescue Storage

20×70 community / fire-rescue storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Fire-Rescue Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Side-by-Side Carport questions, answered.

How much does a 20×70 side-by-side carport cost?

A 20×70 side-by-side carport from Steel and Stud starts at $21,050 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $439/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×70 side-by-side carport price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud side-by-side carport ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×70 side-by-side carport?

Almost always for 1,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud side-by-side carport different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×70 side-by-side carport need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×70 side-by-side carport delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×70 side-by-side carport without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $439/month on a 20×70 side-by-side carport.

What warranty comes with the 20×70 side-by-side carport?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×70 side-by-side carport in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 20×70 side-by-side carport meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Side-by-Side Carport quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$21,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x70 metal building: side elevation showing height and roof line, 1,400 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×70 Side-by-Side Carport

1,400 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×70 steel building delivers 1,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×70 Side-by-Side Carport | Steel and Stud — From $21,050
12
20×70 Side-by-Side Carport
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$24,000$21,050SAVE $2,950
or $439/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×70Side-by-Side Carport
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×70 Side-by-Side Carport, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Apartment owners and small fleet operators use the 20×70 as an open-sided carport covering 6-7 standard vehicles parked perpendicular, or 3 vehicles end-to-end with overhang on both sides. Concrete wedge anchors, all 17.

You're viewing:Side-by-Side Carport·Size20×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$21,050$24,000Save $2,950
or as low as $439/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×70
20×70
this size
$21,050
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,400 sq ft enclosed
  • Open Carport
  • Lowest Price Point
  • Concrete Anchors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X70-SIDE-BY-SIDE-CARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay open cover.

20 feet wide × 70 feet long. Extra-wide certified span with braced legs. Apartment owners and small fleet operators use the 20×70 as an open-sided carport covering 6-7 standard vehicles parked perpendicular, or 3 vehicles end-to-end with overhang on both sides.

2+ vehicle / equipment baysHigh-clearance RV or ag slotPerimeter drainage apron20′ × 70′ · 1,400 sq ft · multi-bay open cover

2+ vehicle / equipment bays · High-clearance RV or ag slot · Perimeter drainage apron

2+ vehicle / equipment bays at the front, high-clearance rv or ag slot in the middle, perimeter drainage apron at the rear. Capacity: 2+ vehicles or mixed RV + equipment. Concrete wedge anchors, all 17 trim colors, no walls — it's the lowest-priced way to cover this footprint.

💡 Pro tip:Open Carport. Size affords: vertical-roof upgrade, enclosed end bay, gutter kit.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×70 Side-by-Side Carport in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Side-by-Side Carport.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Side-by-Side Carport spec sheet.

Width20'
Length70' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Side-by-Side Carport.

DAILY USEEveryday side-by-side carport
Everyday side-by-side carport
1,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a side-by-side carport.
STORAGE OVERFLOWside-by-side carport + seasonal storage
side-by-side carport + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×70 Side-by-Side Carport — what makes it different.

1,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$439/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×70 side-by-side carport is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $439/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×70?

1,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 70′ footprint with 1,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $11,200–$16,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Side-by-Side Carport shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×70 Side-by-Side Carport buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×70 Side-by-Side Carport

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Side-by-Side Carport · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×71×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,300+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Side-by-Side Carport also viewed:

🏡 20×70

Three-Car Detached Garage

20×70 three-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Detached Garage →
🎯 20×70

RV Cover with Storage

20×70 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🏢 20×70

Contractor Workshop

20×70 contractor workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop →
🌾 20×70

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms

20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms →
🏡 20×70

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×70 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
🏢 20×70

Auto Repair Shop

20×70 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🏡 20×70

Barndominium Shell

20×70 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🌾 20×70

Horse Run-In Shed

20×70 horse run-in shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In Shed →
🎯 20×70

Hangar-Style Hobby Shop

20×70 hangar-style hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hangar-Style Hobby Shop →
🏭 20×70

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

20×70 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 20×70

Community / Fire-Rescue Storage

20×70 community / fire-rescue storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Fire-Rescue Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Side-by-Side Carport questions, answered.

How much does a 20×70 side-by-side carport cost?

A 20×70 side-by-side carport from Steel and Stud starts at $21,050 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $439/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×70 side-by-side carport price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud side-by-side carport ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×70 side-by-side carport?

Almost always for 1,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud side-by-side carport different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×70 side-by-side carport need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×70 side-by-side carport delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×70 side-by-side carport without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $439/month on a 20×70 side-by-side carport.

What warranty comes with the 20×70 side-by-side carport?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×70 side-by-side carport in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 20×70 side-by-side carport meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Side-by-Side Carport quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$21,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x70 metal building: side elevation showing height and roof line, 1,400 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×70 Horse Run-In Shed

1,400 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×70 steel building delivers 1,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×70 Horse Run-In Shed | Steel and Stud — From $19,850
12
20×70 Horse Run-In Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$22,650$19,850SAVE $2,800
or $414/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×70Horse Run-In Shed
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×70 Horse Run-In Shed, built for farm and ranch demands.

Hobby farmers with 4-6 horses spec the 20×70 as a run-in shed with one long side open to a paddock. The 70-foot length divides into 3-4 stalls plus a tack/feed room at the end. 14-gauge framing standard; rural property.

You're viewing:Horse Run-In Shed·Size20×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$19,850$22,650Save $2,800
or as low as $414/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×70
20×70
this size
$19,850
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,400 sq ft enclosed
  • 3-Side Enclosed
  • Wainscoting
  • Stall-Ready Layout
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X70-HORSE-RUN-IN-SHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your shedrow horse barn.

20 feet wide × 70 feet long. Center-aisle layout with cross-ties. Hobby farmers with 4-6 horses spec the 20×70 as a run-in shed with one long side open to a paddock.

4 stalls10-FT CENTER AISLETack + Feed room20′ × 70′ · 1,400 sq ft · shedrow horse barn

4 stalls · 10-ft center aisle · Tack + Feed room

4 stalls at the front, 10-ft center aisle in the middle, tack + feed room at the rear. Capacity: 4 horses + tack + feed. The 70-foot length divides into 3-4 stalls plus a tack/feed room at the end.

💡 Pro tip:Stall-Ready Layout. Size affords: dutch doors per stall, wash bay rough-in, fly system.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×70 Horse Run-In Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Horse Run-In Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Horse Run-In Shed spec sheet.

Width20'
Length70' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Horse Run-In Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday horse run-in shed
Everyday horse run-in shed
1,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a horse run-in shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhorse run-in shed + seasonal storage
horse run-in shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×70 Horse Run-In Shed — what makes it different.

1,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$414/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×70 horse run-in shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $414/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×70?

1,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 70′ footprint with 1,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $11,200–$16,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Horse Run-In Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×70 Horse Run-In Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×70 Horse Run-In Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Horse Run-In Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×71×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,300+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Horse Run-In Shed also viewed:

🏡 20×70

Three-Car Detached Garage

20×70 three-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Detached Garage →
🎯 20×70

RV Cover with Storage

20×70 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🏢 20×70

Contractor Workshop

20×70 contractor workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop →
🌾 20×70

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms

20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms →
🏡 20×70

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×70 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
🏢 20×70

Auto Repair Shop

20×70 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🏡 20×70

Barndominium Shell

20×70 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🏢 20×70

Side-by-Side Carport

20×70 side-by-side carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Side-by-Side Carport →
🎯 20×70

Hangar-Style Hobby Shop

20×70 hangar-style hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hangar-Style Hobby Shop →
🏭 20×70

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

20×70 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 20×70

Community / Fire-Rescue Storage

20×70 community / fire-rescue storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Fire-Rescue Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Horse Run-In Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 20×70 horse run-in shed cost?

A 20×70 horse run-in shed from Steel and Stud starts at $19,850 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $414/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×70 horse run-in shed price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud horse run-in shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×70 horse run-in shed?

Almost always for 1,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud horse run-in shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×70 horse run-in shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×70 horse run-in shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×70 horse run-in shed without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $414/month on a 20×70 horse run-in shed.

What warranty comes with the 20×70 horse run-in shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×70 horse run-in shed in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 20×70 horse run-in shed stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Horse Run-In Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$19,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x70 metal building: side elevation showing height and roof line, 1,400 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×70 Horse Run-In Shed

1,400 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×70 steel building delivers 1,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×70 Horse Run-In Shed | Steel and Stud — From $19,850
12
20×70 Horse Run-In Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$22,650$19,850SAVE $2,800
or $414/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×70Horse Run-In Shed
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×70 Horse Run-In Shed, built for farm and ranch demands.

Hobby farmers with 4-6 horses spec the 20×70 as a run-in shed with one long side open to a paddock. The 70-foot length divides into 3-4 stalls plus a tack/feed room at the end. 14-gauge framing standard; rural property.

You're viewing:Horse Run-In Shed·Size20×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$19,850$22,650Save $2,800
or as low as $414/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×70
20×70
this size
$19,850
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,400 sq ft enclosed
  • 3-Side Enclosed
  • Wainscoting
  • Stall-Ready Layout
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X70-HORSE-RUN-IN-SHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your shedrow horse barn.

20 feet wide × 70 feet long. Center-aisle layout with cross-ties. Hobby farmers with 4-6 horses spec the 20×70 as a run-in shed with one long side open to a paddock.

4 stalls10-FT CENTER AISLETack + Feed room20′ × 70′ · 1,400 sq ft · shedrow horse barn

4 stalls · 10-ft center aisle · Tack + Feed room

4 stalls at the front, 10-ft center aisle in the middle, tack + feed room at the rear. Capacity: 4 horses + tack + feed. The 70-foot length divides into 3-4 stalls plus a tack/feed room at the end.

💡 Pro tip:Stall-Ready Layout. Size affords: dutch doors per stall, wash bay rough-in, fly system.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×70 Horse Run-In Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Horse Run-In Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Horse Run-In Shed spec sheet.

Width20'
Length70' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Horse Run-In Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday horse run-in shed
Everyday horse run-in shed
1,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a horse run-in shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhorse run-in shed + seasonal storage
horse run-in shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×70 Horse Run-In Shed — what makes it different.

1,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$414/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×70 horse run-in shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $414/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×70?

1,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 70′ footprint with 1,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $11,200–$16,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Horse Run-In Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×70 Horse Run-In Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×70 Horse Run-In Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Horse Run-In Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×71×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,300+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Horse Run-In Shed also viewed:

🏡 20×70

Three-Car Detached Garage

20×70 three-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Detached Garage →
🎯 20×70

RV Cover with Storage

20×70 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🏢 20×70

Contractor Workshop

20×70 contractor workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop →
🌾 20×70

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms

20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms →
🏡 20×70

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×70 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
🏢 20×70

Auto Repair Shop

20×70 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🏡 20×70

Barndominium Shell

20×70 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🏢 20×70

Side-by-Side Carport

20×70 side-by-side carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Side-by-Side Carport →
🎯 20×70

Hangar-Style Hobby Shop

20×70 hangar-style hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hangar-Style Hobby Shop →
🏭 20×70

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

20×70 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 20×70

Community / Fire-Rescue Storage

20×70 community / fire-rescue storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Fire-Rescue Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Horse Run-In Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 20×70 horse run-in shed cost?

A 20×70 horse run-in shed from Steel and Stud starts at $19,850 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $414/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×70 horse run-in shed price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud horse run-in shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×70 horse run-in shed?

Almost always for 1,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud horse run-in shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×70 horse run-in shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×70 horse run-in shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×70 horse run-in shed without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $414/month on a 20×70 horse run-in shed.

What warranty comes with the 20×70 horse run-in shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×70 horse run-in shed in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 20×70 horse run-in shed stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Horse Run-In Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$19,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x70 metal building: side elevation showing height and roof line, 1,400 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×70 Hangar-Style Hobby Shop

1,400 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×70 steel building delivers 1,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×70 Hangar-Style Hobby Shop | Steel and Stud — From $19,200
12
20×70 Hangar-Style Hobby Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$21,900$19,200SAVE $2,700
or $400/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×70Hangar-Style Hobby Shop
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×70 Hangar-Style Hobby Shop, built for hobby and recreational use.

Car collectors and restoration hobbyists use the 20×70 as a man cave shop with 4-6 classics on display, a lift bay, and a finished lounge area. A 12-foot eave clears a mid-rise lift; pre-framed gable openings let you.

You're viewing:Hangar-Style Hobby Shop·Size20×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$19,200$21,900Save $2,700
or as low as $400/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×70
20×70
this size
$19,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,400 sq ft enclosed
  • 12' Eave
  • Insulated Walls
  • 14x14 Door Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X70-HANGAR-STYLE-HOBBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your single-aircraft hangar.

20 feet wide × 70 feet long. Bi-fold or hydraulic door spans full width. Car collectors and restoration hobbyists use the 20×70 as a man cave shop with 4-6 classics on display, a lift bay, and a finished lounge area.

Single aircraft (≤20ft wing)TOOLS / ENGINE WORKOffice nook20′ × 70′ · 1,400 sq ft · single-aircraft hangar

Single aircraft (≤20ft wing) · Tools / engine work · Office nook

Single aircraft (≤20ft wing) at the front, tools / engine work in the middle, office nook at the rear. Capacity: 1 light aircraft up to 20ft wingspan. A 12-foot eave clears a mid-rise lift; pre-framed gable openings let you swap a roll-up for a 20×70 hangar-style door later.

💡 Pro tip:12' Eave. Size affords: workbench, parts shelving.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×70 Hangar-Style Hobby Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hangar-Style Hobby Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hangar-Style Hobby Shop spec sheet.

Width20'
Length70' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hangar-Style Hobby Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday hangar-style hobby shop
Everyday hangar-style hobby shop
1,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hangar-style hobby shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhangar-style hobby shop + seasonal storage
hangar-style hobby shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×70 Hangar-Style Hobby Shop — what makes it different.

1,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$400/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×70 hangar-style hobby shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $400/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×70?

1,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 70′ footprint with 1,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $11,200–$16,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hangar-Style Hobby Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×70 Hangar-Style Hobby Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×70 Hangar-Style Hobby Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hangar-Style Hobby Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×71×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,300+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hangar-Style Hobby Shop also viewed:

🏡 20×70

Three-Car Detached Garage

20×70 three-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Detached Garage →
🎯 20×70

RV Cover with Storage

20×70 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🏢 20×70

Contractor Workshop

20×70 contractor workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop →
🌾 20×70

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms

20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms →
🏡 20×70

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×70 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
🏢 20×70

Auto Repair Shop

20×70 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🏡 20×70

Barndominium Shell

20×70 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🏢 20×70

Side-by-Side Carport

20×70 side-by-side carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Side-by-Side Carport →
🌾 20×70

Horse Run-In Shed

20×70 horse run-in shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In Shed →
🏭 20×70

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

20×70 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 20×70

Community / Fire-Rescue Storage

20×70 community / fire-rescue storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Fire-Rescue Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hangar-Style Hobby Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 20×70 hangar-style hobby shop cost?

A 20×70 hangar-style hobby shop from Steel and Stud starts at $19,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $400/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×70 hangar-style hobby shop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud hangar-style hobby shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×70 hangar-style hobby shop?

Almost always for 1,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hangar-style hobby shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×70 hangar-style hobby shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×70 hangar-style hobby shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×70 hangar-style hobby shop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $400/month on a 20×70 hangar-style hobby shop.

What warranty comes with the 20×70 hangar-style hobby shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×70 hangar-style hobby shop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 20×70 hangar-style hobby shop for year-round use?

Yes — Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a hangar-style hobby shop to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Hangar-Style Hobby Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$19,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x70 metal building: side elevation showing height and roof line, 1,400 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×70 Hangar-Style Hobby Shop

1,400 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×70 steel building delivers 1,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×70 Hangar-Style Hobby Shop | Steel and Stud — From $19,200
12
20×70 Hangar-Style Hobby Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$21,900$19,200SAVE $2,700
or $400/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×70Hangar-Style Hobby Shop
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×70 Hangar-Style Hobby Shop, built for hobby and recreational use.

Car collectors and restoration hobbyists use the 20×70 as a man cave shop with 4-6 classics on display, a lift bay, and a finished lounge area. A 12-foot eave clears a mid-rise lift; pre-framed gable openings let you.

You're viewing:Hangar-Style Hobby Shop·Size20×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$19,200$21,900Save $2,700
or as low as $400/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×70
20×70
this size
$19,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,400 sq ft enclosed
  • 12' Eave
  • Insulated Walls
  • 14x14 Door Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X70-HANGAR-STYLE-HOBBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your single-aircraft hangar.

20 feet wide × 70 feet long. Bi-fold or hydraulic door spans full width. Car collectors and restoration hobbyists use the 20×70 as a man cave shop with 4-6 classics on display, a lift bay, and a finished lounge area.

Single aircraft (≤20ft wing)TOOLS / ENGINE WORKOffice nook20′ × 70′ · 1,400 sq ft · single-aircraft hangar

Single aircraft (≤20ft wing) · Tools / engine work · Office nook

Single aircraft (≤20ft wing) at the front, tools / engine work in the middle, office nook at the rear. Capacity: 1 light aircraft up to 20ft wingspan. A 12-foot eave clears a mid-rise lift; pre-framed gable openings let you swap a roll-up for a 20×70 hangar-style door later.

💡 Pro tip:12' Eave. Size affords: workbench, parts shelving.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×70 Hangar-Style Hobby Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hangar-Style Hobby Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hangar-Style Hobby Shop spec sheet.

Width20'
Length70' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hangar-Style Hobby Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday hangar-style hobby shop
Everyday hangar-style hobby shop
1,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hangar-style hobby shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhangar-style hobby shop + seasonal storage
hangar-style hobby shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×70 Hangar-Style Hobby Shop — what makes it different.

1,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$400/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×70 hangar-style hobby shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $400/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×70?

1,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 70′ footprint with 1,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $11,200–$16,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hangar-Style Hobby Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×70 Hangar-Style Hobby Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×70 Hangar-Style Hobby Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hangar-Style Hobby Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×71×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,300+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hangar-Style Hobby Shop also viewed:

🏡 20×70

Three-Car Detached Garage

20×70 three-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Detached Garage →
🎯 20×70

RV Cover with Storage

20×70 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🏢 20×70

Contractor Workshop

20×70 contractor workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop →
🌾 20×70

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms

20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms →
🏡 20×70

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×70 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
🏢 20×70

Auto Repair Shop

20×70 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🏡 20×70

Barndominium Shell

20×70 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🏢 20×70

Side-by-Side Carport

20×70 side-by-side carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Side-by-Side Carport →
🌾 20×70

Horse Run-In Shed

20×70 horse run-in shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In Shed →
🏭 20×70

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

20×70 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 20×70

Community / Fire-Rescue Storage

20×70 community / fire-rescue storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Fire-Rescue Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hangar-Style Hobby Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 20×70 hangar-style hobby shop cost?

A 20×70 hangar-style hobby shop from Steel and Stud starts at $19,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $400/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×70 hangar-style hobby shop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud hangar-style hobby shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×70 hangar-style hobby shop?

Almost always for 1,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hangar-style hobby shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×70 hangar-style hobby shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×70 hangar-style hobby shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×70 hangar-style hobby shop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $400/month on a 20×70 hangar-style hobby shop.

What warranty comes with the 20×70 hangar-style hobby shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×70 hangar-style hobby shop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 20×70 hangar-style hobby shop for year-round use?

Yes — Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a hangar-style hobby shop to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Hangar-Style Hobby Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$19,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x70 metal building: side elevation showing height and roof line, 1,400 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×70 Warehouse / Inventory Storage

1,400 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×70 steel building delivers 1,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×70 Warehouse / Inventory Storage | Steel and Stud — From $21,450
12
20×70 Warehouse / Inventory Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$24,450$21,450SAVE $3,000
or $447/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×70Warehouse / Inventory Storage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×70 Warehouse / Inventory Storage, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Small e-commerce operators and contractors store palletized inventory along both long walls with a 6-foot center aisle for forklift access. 1,400 sq ft holds roughly 35-40 standard pallets. 12-foot eaves accommodate.

You're viewing:Warehouse / Inventory Storage·Size20×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$21,450$24,450Save $3,000
or as low as $447/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×70
20×70
this size
$21,450
24×70
wider
$27,050
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,400 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 10x10 Roll-Up
  • Forklift Access
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X70-WAREHOUSE-INVENTBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your small-business warehouse.

20 feet wide × 70 feet long. Single roll-up door, hand-truck operation. Small e-commerce operators and contractors store palletized inventory along both long walls with a 6-foot center aisle for forklift access.

Loading areaINVENTORY RACKSOffice corner20′ × 70′ · 1,400 sq ft · small-business warehouse

Loading area · Inventory racks · Office corner

Loading area at the front, inventory racks in the middle, office corner at the rear. Capacity: ~28 pallet positions. 1,400 sq ft holds roughly 35-40 standard pallets.

💡 Pro tip:Forklift Access. Size affords: shelving, desk + computer.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×70 Warehouse / Inventory Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Warehouse / Inventory Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Warehouse / Inventory Storage spec sheet.

Width20'
Length70' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Warehouse / Inventory Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday warehouse / inventory storage
Everyday warehouse / inventory storage
1,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a warehouse / inventory storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWwarehouse / inventory storage + seasonal storage
warehouse / inventory storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×70 Warehouse / Inventory Storage — what makes it different.

1,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$447/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×70 warehouse / inventory storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $447/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×70?

1,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 70′ footprint with 1,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $11,200–$16,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Warehouse / Inventory Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×70 Warehouse / Inventory Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×70 Warehouse / Inventory Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Warehouse / Inventory Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×71×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,300+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Warehouse / Inventory Storage also viewed:

🏡 20×70

Three-Car Detached Garage

20×70 three-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Detached Garage →
🎯 20×70

RV Cover with Storage

20×70 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🏢 20×70

Contractor Workshop

20×70 contractor workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop →
🌾 20×70

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms

20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms →
🏡 20×70

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×70 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
🏢 20×70

Auto Repair Shop

20×70 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🏡 20×70

Barndominium Shell

20×70 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🏢 20×70

Side-by-Side Carport

20×70 side-by-side carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Side-by-Side Carport →
🌾 20×70

Horse Run-In Shed

20×70 horse run-in shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In Shed →
🎯 20×70

Hangar-Style Hobby Shop

20×70 hangar-style hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hangar-Style Hobby Shop →
🏛️ 20×70

Community / Fire-Rescue Storage

20×70 community / fire-rescue storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Fire-Rescue Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Warehouse / Inventory Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×70 warehouse / inventory storage cost?

A 20×70 warehouse / inventory storage from Steel and Stud starts at $21,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $447/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×70 warehouse / inventory storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud warehouse / inventory storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×70 warehouse / inventory storage?

Almost always for 1,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud warehouse / inventory storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×70 warehouse / inventory storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×70 warehouse / inventory storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×70 warehouse / inventory storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $447/month on a 20×70 warehouse / inventory storage.

What warranty comes with the 20×70 warehouse / inventory storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×70 warehouse / inventory storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 20×70 warehouse / inventory storage handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 20×70 warehouse / inventory storage ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request — call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Warehouse / Inventory Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$21,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x70 metal building: side elevation showing height and roof line, 1,400 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×70 Warehouse / Inventory Storage

1,400 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×70 steel building delivers 1,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×70 Warehouse / Inventory Storage | Steel and Stud — From $21,450
12
20×70 Warehouse / Inventory Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$24,450$21,450SAVE $3,000
or $447/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×70Warehouse / Inventory Storage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×70 Warehouse / Inventory Storage, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Small e-commerce operators and contractors store palletized inventory along both long walls with a 6-foot center aisle for forklift access. 1,400 sq ft holds roughly 35-40 standard pallets. 12-foot eaves accommodate.

You're viewing:Warehouse / Inventory Storage·Size20×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$21,450$24,450Save $3,000
or as low as $447/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×70
20×70
this size
$21,450
24×70
wider
$27,050
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,400 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 10x10 Roll-Up
  • Forklift Access
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X70-WAREHOUSE-INVENTBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your small-business warehouse.

20 feet wide × 70 feet long. Single roll-up door, hand-truck operation. Small e-commerce operators and contractors store palletized inventory along both long walls with a 6-foot center aisle for forklift access.

Loading areaINVENTORY RACKSOffice corner20′ × 70′ · 1,400 sq ft · small-business warehouse

Loading area · Inventory racks · Office corner

Loading area at the front, inventory racks in the middle, office corner at the rear. Capacity: ~28 pallet positions. 1,400 sq ft holds roughly 35-40 standard pallets.

💡 Pro tip:Forklift Access. Size affords: shelving, desk + computer.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×70 Warehouse / Inventory Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Warehouse / Inventory Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Warehouse / Inventory Storage spec sheet.

Width20'
Length70' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Warehouse / Inventory Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday warehouse / inventory storage
Everyday warehouse / inventory storage
1,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a warehouse / inventory storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWwarehouse / inventory storage + seasonal storage
warehouse / inventory storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×70 Warehouse / Inventory Storage — what makes it different.

1,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$447/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×70 warehouse / inventory storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $447/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×70?

1,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 70′ footprint with 1,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $11,200–$16,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Warehouse / Inventory Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×70 Warehouse / Inventory Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×70 Warehouse / Inventory Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Warehouse / Inventory Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×71×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,300+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Warehouse / Inventory Storage also viewed:

🏡 20×70

Three-Car Detached Garage

20×70 three-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Detached Garage →
🎯 20×70

RV Cover with Storage

20×70 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🏢 20×70

Contractor Workshop

20×70 contractor workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop →
🌾 20×70

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms

20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms →
🏡 20×70

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×70 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
🏢 20×70

Auto Repair Shop

20×70 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🏡 20×70

Barndominium Shell

20×70 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🏢 20×70

Side-by-Side Carport

20×70 side-by-side carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Side-by-Side Carport →
🌾 20×70

Horse Run-In Shed

20×70 horse run-in shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In Shed →
🎯 20×70

Hangar-Style Hobby Shop

20×70 hangar-style hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hangar-Style Hobby Shop →
🏛️ 20×70

Community / Fire-Rescue Storage

20×70 community / fire-rescue storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Fire-Rescue Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Warehouse / Inventory Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×70 warehouse / inventory storage cost?

A 20×70 warehouse / inventory storage from Steel and Stud starts at $21,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $447/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×70 warehouse / inventory storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud warehouse / inventory storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×70 warehouse / inventory storage?

Almost always for 1,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud warehouse / inventory storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×70 warehouse / inventory storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×70 warehouse / inventory storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×70 warehouse / inventory storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $447/month on a 20×70 warehouse / inventory storage.

What warranty comes with the 20×70 warehouse / inventory storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×70 warehouse / inventory storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 20×70 warehouse / inventory storage handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 20×70 warehouse / inventory storage ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request — call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Warehouse / Inventory Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$21,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x70 metal building: side elevation showing height and roof line, 1,400 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×70 Community / Fire-Rescue Storage

1,400 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×70 steel building delivers 1,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×70 Community / Fire-Rescue Storage | Steel and Stud — From $21,150
12
20×70 Community / Fire-Rescue Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$24,100$21,150SAVE $2,950
or $441/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×70Community / Fire-Rescue Storage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×70 Community / Fire-Rescue Storage, engineered to code for assembly use.

Volunteer fire departments, HOAs, and small municipalities use the 20×70 to shelter a brush truck, ATV, and equipment cache in one footprint. Stamped engineered drawings ship with every certified build to clear local.

You're viewing:Community / Fire-Rescue Storage·Size20×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$21,150$24,100Save $2,950
or as low as $441/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×70
20×70
this size
$21,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,400 sq ft enclosed
  • Stamped Drawings
  • IBC Certified
  • Hurricane Pkg Available
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X70-COMMUNITY-FIRE-RBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your jobsite storage layout.

20 feet wide × 70 feet long. Drive-in door for daily load-in/load-out. Volunteer fire departments, HOAs, and small municipalities use the 20×70 to shelter a brush truck, ATV, and equipment cache in one footprint.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Material racksEquipment parkingSecure tool cage20′ × 70′ · 1,400 sq ft · jobsite storage layout

Material racks · Equipment parking · Secure tool cage

Material racks at the front, equipment parking in the middle, secure tool cage at the rear. Capacity: crew tools + materials + small equipment. Stamped engineered drawings ship with every certified build to clear local permit review.

💡 Pro tip:Stamped Drawings. Size affords: tool cage, material racking, site-power panel.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×70 Community / Fire-Rescue Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Community / Fire-Rescue Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Community / Fire-Rescue Storage spec sheet.

Width20'
Length70' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Community / Fire-Rescue Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday community / fire-rescue storage
Everyday community / fire-rescue storage
1,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a community / fire-rescue storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommunity / fire-rescue storage + seasonal storage
community / fire-rescue storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×70 Community / Fire-Rescue Storage — what makes it different.

1,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$441/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×70 community / fire-rescue storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $441/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×70?

1,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 70′ footprint with 1,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $11,200–$16,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Community / Fire-Rescue Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×70 Community / Fire-Rescue Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×70 Community / Fire-Rescue Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Community / Fire-Rescue Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×71×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,300+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Community / Fire-Rescue Storage also viewed:

🏡 20×70

Three-Car Detached Garage

20×70 three-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Detached Garage →
🎯 20×70

RV Cover with Storage

20×70 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🏢 20×70

Contractor Workshop

20×70 contractor workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop →
🌾 20×70

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms

20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms →
🏡 20×70

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×70 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
🏢 20×70

Auto Repair Shop

20×70 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🏡 20×70

Barndominium Shell

20×70 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🏢 20×70

Side-by-Side Carport

20×70 side-by-side carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Side-by-Side Carport →
🌾 20×70

Horse Run-In Shed

20×70 horse run-in shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In Shed →
🎯 20×70

Hangar-Style Hobby Shop

20×70 hangar-style hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hangar-Style Hobby Shop →
🏭 20×70

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

20×70 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Community / Fire-Rescue Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×70 community / fire-rescue storage cost?

A 20×70 community / fire-rescue storage from Steel and Stud starts at $21,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $441/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×70 community / fire-rescue storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud community / fire-rescue storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×70 community / fire-rescue storage?

Almost always for 1,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud community / fire-rescue storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×70 community / fire-rescue storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×70 community / fire-rescue storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×70 community / fire-rescue storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $441/month on a 20×70 community / fire-rescue storage.

What warranty comes with the 20×70 community / fire-rescue storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×70 community / fire-rescue storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 20×70 community / fire-rescue storage pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud's engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Community / Fire-Rescue Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$21,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x70 metal building: side elevation showing height and roof line, 1,400 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×70 Community / Fire-Rescue Storage

1,400 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×70 steel building delivers 1,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×70 Community / Fire-Rescue Storage | Steel and Stud — From $21,150
12
20×70 Community / Fire-Rescue Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$24,100$21,150SAVE $2,950
or $441/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×70Community / Fire-Rescue Storage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×70 Community / Fire-Rescue Storage, engineered to code for assembly use.

Volunteer fire departments, HOAs, and small municipalities use the 20×70 to shelter a brush truck, ATV, and equipment cache in one footprint. Stamped engineered drawings ship with every certified build to clear local.

You're viewing:Community / Fire-Rescue Storage·Size20×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$21,150$24,100Save $2,950
or as low as $441/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×70
20×70
this size
$21,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,400 sq ft enclosed
  • Stamped Drawings
  • IBC Certified
  • Hurricane Pkg Available
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X70-COMMUNITY-FIRE-RBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your jobsite storage layout.

20 feet wide × 70 feet long. Drive-in door for daily load-in/load-out. Volunteer fire departments, HOAs, and small municipalities use the 20×70 to shelter a brush truck, ATV, and equipment cache in one footprint.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Material racksEquipment parkingSecure tool cage20′ × 70′ · 1,400 sq ft · jobsite storage layout

Material racks · Equipment parking · Secure tool cage

Material racks at the front, equipment parking in the middle, secure tool cage at the rear. Capacity: crew tools + materials + small equipment. Stamped engineered drawings ship with every certified build to clear local permit review.

💡 Pro tip:Stamped Drawings. Size affords: tool cage, material racking, site-power panel.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×70 Community / Fire-Rescue Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Community / Fire-Rescue Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Community / Fire-Rescue Storage spec sheet.

Width20'
Length70' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Community / Fire-Rescue Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday community / fire-rescue storage
Everyday community / fire-rescue storage
1,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a community / fire-rescue storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommunity / fire-rescue storage + seasonal storage
community / fire-rescue storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×70 Community / Fire-Rescue Storage — what makes it different.

1,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$441/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×70 community / fire-rescue storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $441/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×70?

1,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 70′ footprint with 1,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $11,200–$16,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Community / Fire-Rescue Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×70 Community / Fire-Rescue Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×70 Community / Fire-Rescue Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Community / Fire-Rescue Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×71×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,300+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Community / Fire-Rescue Storage also viewed:

🏡 20×70

Three-Car Detached Garage

20×70 three-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Detached Garage →
🎯 20×70

RV Cover with Storage

20×70 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🏢 20×70

Contractor Workshop

20×70 contractor workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop →
🌾 20×70

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms

20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms →
🏡 20×70

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×70 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
🏢 20×70

Auto Repair Shop

20×70 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🏡 20×70

Barndominium Shell

20×70 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🏢 20×70

Side-by-Side Carport

20×70 side-by-side carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Side-by-Side Carport →
🌾 20×70

Horse Run-In Shed

20×70 horse run-in shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In Shed →
🎯 20×70

Hangar-Style Hobby Shop

20×70 hangar-style hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hangar-Style Hobby Shop →
🏭 20×70

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

20×70 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Community / Fire-Rescue Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×70 community / fire-rescue storage cost?

A 20×70 community / fire-rescue storage from Steel and Stud starts at $21,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $441/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×70 community / fire-rescue storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud community / fire-rescue storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×70 community / fire-rescue storage?

Almost always for 1,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud community / fire-rescue storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×70 community / fire-rescue storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×70 community / fire-rescue storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×70 community / fire-rescue storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $441/month on a 20×70 community / fire-rescue storage.

What warranty comes with the 20×70 community / fire-rescue storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×70 community / fire-rescue storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 20×70 community / fire-rescue storage pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud's engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Community / Fire-Rescue Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$21,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x75 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,500 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×75 Workshop Kit for Tradespeople

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 75′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×75 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×75 Workshop Kit for Tradespeople | Steel and Stud — From $22,400
12
20×75 Workshop Kit for Tradespeople
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$25,550$22,400SAVE $3,150
or $467/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×75Workshop Kit for Tradespeople
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×75 Workshop Kit for Tradespeople, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Tradespeople running cabinet shops, welding bays, or small fab operations buy the 20×75 workshop kit because 75 feet of depth lets you stage stock at one end and run a finished assembly line down the length. Two roll-up.

You're viewing:Workshop Kit for Tradespeople·Size20×75·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$22,400$25,550Save $3,150
or as low as $467/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×75
20×75
this size
$22,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • Drive-Through Layout
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X75-WORKSHOP-KIT-TRABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your workshop layout.

20 feet wide × 75 feet long. Side-load + walk-in, dust-collection ready. Tradespeople running cabinet shops, welding bays, or small fab operations buy the 20×75 workshop kit because 75 feet of depth lets you stage stock at one end and run a finished assembly line down the length.

Workbench wallTABLE SAW / CENTERLumber / Material rack20′ × 75′ · 1,500 sq ft · workshop layout

Workbench wall · Table saw / Center · Lumber / Material rack

Workbench wall at the front, table saw / center in the middle, lumber / material rack at the rear. Capacity: 1-person serious shop. Two roll-up doors at opposite ends turn it into a drive-through.

💡 Pro tip:Drive-Through Layout. Size affords: dust collection, 220V subpanel, shop sink.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×75 Workshop Kit for Tradespeople in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Workshop Kit for Tradespeople.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×75 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Workshop Kit for Tradespeople spec sheet.

Width20'
Length75' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Workshop Kit for Tradespeople.

DAILY USEEveryday workshop kit for tradespeople
Everyday workshop kit for tradespeople
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a workshop kit for tradespeople.
STORAGE OVERFLOWworkshop kit for tradespeople + seasonal storage
workshop kit for tradespeople + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×75 Workshop Kit for Tradespeople — what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$467/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $467/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×75?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 75′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Workshop Kit for Tradespeople shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×75 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×75 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×75 Workshop Kit for Tradespeople buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×75 Workshop Kit for Tradespeople

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Workshop Kit for Tradespeople · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×76×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,750+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Workshop Kit for Tradespeople also viewed:

🏢 20×75

Commercial Garage for Auto Shops

20×75 commercial garage for auto shops configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Garage for Auto Shops →
🏭 20×75

Fabrication Shop

20×75 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏡 20×75

Metal Barndominium Shell

20×75 metal barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →
🌾 20×75

Horse Barn with Stalls

20×75 horse barn with stalls configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →
🏢 20×75

Fleet Garage for Service Vans

20×75 fleet garage for service vans configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vans →
🌾 20×75

Agricultural Barn

20×75 agricultural barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Barn →
🏭 20×75

Equipment Storage Building

20×75 equipment storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Building →
🏢 20×75

Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub

20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub →
🎯 20×75

RV Garage with Workshop

20×75 rv garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage with Workshop →
🏡 20×75

Workshop and Hobby Garage

20×75 workshop and hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop and Hobby Garage →
🏛️ 20×75

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×75 storage building for self-storage operators configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Workshop Kit for Tradespeople questions, answered.

How much does a 20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople cost?

A 20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople from Steel and Stud starts at $22,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $467/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud workshop kit for tradespeople ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople?

Almost always for 1,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud workshop kit for tradespeople different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $467/month on a 20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople.

What warranty comes with the 20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Workshop Kit for Tradespeople quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$22,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x75 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,500 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×75 Workshop Kit for Tradespeople

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 75′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×75 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×75 Workshop Kit for Tradespeople | Steel and Stud — From $22,400
12
20×75 Workshop Kit for Tradespeople
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$25,550$22,400SAVE $3,150
or $467/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×75Workshop Kit for Tradespeople
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×75 Workshop Kit for Tradespeople, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Tradespeople running cabinet shops, welding bays, or small fab operations buy the 20×75 workshop kit because 75 feet of depth lets you stage stock at one end and run a finished assembly line down the length. Two roll-up.

You're viewing:Workshop Kit for Tradespeople·Size20×75·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$22,400$25,550Save $3,150
or as low as $467/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×75
20×75
this size
$22,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • Drive-Through Layout
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X75-WORKSHOP-KIT-TRABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your workshop layout.

20 feet wide × 75 feet long. Side-load + walk-in, dust-collection ready. Tradespeople running cabinet shops, welding bays, or small fab operations buy the 20×75 workshop kit because 75 feet of depth lets you stage stock at one end and run a finished assembly line down the length.

Workbench wallTABLE SAW / CENTERLumber / Material rack20′ × 75′ · 1,500 sq ft · workshop layout

Workbench wall · Table saw / Center · Lumber / Material rack

Workbench wall at the front, table saw / center in the middle, lumber / material rack at the rear. Capacity: 1-person serious shop. Two roll-up doors at opposite ends turn it into a drive-through.

💡 Pro tip:Drive-Through Layout. Size affords: dust collection, 220V subpanel, shop sink.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×75 Workshop Kit for Tradespeople in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Workshop Kit for Tradespeople.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×75 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Workshop Kit for Tradespeople spec sheet.

Width20'
Length75' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Workshop Kit for Tradespeople.

DAILY USEEveryday workshop kit for tradespeople
Everyday workshop kit for tradespeople
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a workshop kit for tradespeople.
STORAGE OVERFLOWworkshop kit for tradespeople + seasonal storage
workshop kit for tradespeople + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×75 Workshop Kit for Tradespeople — what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$467/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $467/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×75?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 75′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Workshop Kit for Tradespeople shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×75 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×75 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×75 Workshop Kit for Tradespeople buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×75 Workshop Kit for Tradespeople

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Workshop Kit for Tradespeople · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×76×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,750+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Workshop Kit for Tradespeople also viewed:

🏢 20×75

Commercial Garage for Auto Shops

20×75 commercial garage for auto shops configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Garage for Auto Shops →
🏭 20×75

Fabrication Shop

20×75 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏡 20×75

Metal Barndominium Shell

20×75 metal barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →
🌾 20×75

Horse Barn with Stalls

20×75 horse barn with stalls configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →
🏢 20×75

Fleet Garage for Service Vans

20×75 fleet garage for service vans configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vans →
🌾 20×75

Agricultural Barn

20×75 agricultural barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Barn →
🏭 20×75

Equipment Storage Building

20×75 equipment storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Building →
🏢 20×75

Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub

20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub →
🎯 20×75

RV Garage with Workshop

20×75 rv garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage with Workshop →
🏡 20×75

Workshop and Hobby Garage

20×75 workshop and hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop and Hobby Garage →
🏛️ 20×75

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×75 storage building for self-storage operators configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Workshop Kit for Tradespeople questions, answered.

How much does a 20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople cost?

A 20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople from Steel and Stud starts at $22,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $467/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud workshop kit for tradespeople ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople?

Almost always for 1,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud workshop kit for tradespeople different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $467/month on a 20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople.

What warranty comes with the 20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Workshop Kit for Tradespeople quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$22,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x75 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,500 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×75 Commercial Garage for Auto Shops

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 75′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×75 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×75 Commercial Garage for Auto Shops | Steel and Stud — From $22,400
12
20×75 Commercial Garage for Auto Shops
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$25,550$22,400SAVE $3,150
or $467/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×75Commercial Garage for Auto Shops
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×75 Commercial Garage for Auto Shops, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Auto repair shops use the 20×75 commercial garage as a single-bay configuration with two lifts staggered down the length, a parts wall along one side, and a customer waiting nook at the front. The 75-ft depth means you.

You're viewing:Commercial Garage for Auto Shops·Size20×75·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$22,400$25,550Save $3,150
or as low as $467/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×75
20×75
this size
$22,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • Two-Lift Capable
  • Insulated
  • Roll-Up Doors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X75-COMMERCIAL-GARAGBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

20 feet wide × 75 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. Auto repair shops use the 20×75 commercial garage as a single-bay configuration with two lifts staggered down the length, a parts wall along one side, and a customer waiting nook at the front.

2 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay20′ × 75′ · 1,500 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

2 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

2 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 2 vehicles + full hobby shop. The 75-ft depth means you can pull a vehicle in, work on it, and still have a second car staged behind.

💡 Pro tip:Two-Lift Capable. Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×75 Commercial Garage for Auto Shops in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Commercial Garage for Auto Shops.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×75 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Commercial Garage for Auto Shops spec sheet.

Width20'
Length75' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Commercial Garage for Auto Shops.

DAILY USEEveryday commercial garage for auto shops
Everyday commercial garage for auto shops
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a commercial garage for auto shops.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommercial garage for auto shops + seasonal storage
commercial garage for auto shops + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×75 Commercial Garage for Auto Shops — what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$467/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×75 commercial garage for auto shops is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $467/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×75?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 75′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Commercial Garage for Auto Shops shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×75 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×75 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×75 Commercial Garage for Auto Shops buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×75 Commercial Garage for Auto Shops

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Commercial Garage for Auto Shops · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×76×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,750+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Commercial Garage for Auto Shops also viewed:

🏢 20×75

Workshop Kit for Tradespeople

20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Kit for Tradespeople →
🏭 20×75

Fabrication Shop

20×75 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏡 20×75

Metal Barndominium Shell

20×75 metal barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →
🌾 20×75

Horse Barn with Stalls

20×75 horse barn with stalls configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →
🏢 20×75

Fleet Garage for Service Vans

20×75 fleet garage for service vans configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vans →
🌾 20×75

Agricultural Barn

20×75 agricultural barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Barn →
🏭 20×75

Equipment Storage Building

20×75 equipment storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Building →
🏢 20×75

Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub

20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub →
🎯 20×75

RV Garage with Workshop

20×75 rv garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage with Workshop →
🏡 20×75

Workshop and Hobby Garage

20×75 workshop and hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop and Hobby Garage →
🏛️ 20×75

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×75 storage building for self-storage operators configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Commercial Garage for Auto Shops questions, answered.

How much does a 20×75 commercial garage for auto shops cost?

A 20×75 commercial garage for auto shops from Steel and Stud starts at $22,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $467/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×75 commercial garage for auto shops price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud commercial garage for auto shops ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×75 commercial garage for auto shops?

Almost always for 1,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud commercial garage for auto shops different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×75 commercial garage for auto shops need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×75 commercial garage for auto shops delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×75 commercial garage for auto shops without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $467/month on a 20×75 commercial garage for auto shops.

What warranty comes with the 20×75 commercial garage for auto shops?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×75 commercial garage for auto shops in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 20×75 commercial garage for auto shops meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Commercial Garage for Auto Shops quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$22,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x75 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,500 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×75 Commercial Garage for Auto Shops

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 75′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×75 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×75 Commercial Garage for Auto Shops | Steel and Stud — From $22,400
12
20×75 Commercial Garage for Auto Shops
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$25,550$22,400SAVE $3,150
or $467/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×75Commercial Garage for Auto Shops
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×75 Commercial Garage for Auto Shops, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Auto repair shops use the 20×75 commercial garage as a single-bay configuration with two lifts staggered down the length, a parts wall along one side, and a customer waiting nook at the front. The 75-ft depth means you.

You're viewing:Commercial Garage for Auto Shops·Size20×75·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$22,400$25,550Save $3,150
or as low as $467/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×75
20×75
this size
$22,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • Two-Lift Capable
  • Insulated
  • Roll-Up Doors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X75-COMMERCIAL-GARAGBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

20 feet wide × 75 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. Auto repair shops use the 20×75 commercial garage as a single-bay configuration with two lifts staggered down the length, a parts wall along one side, and a customer waiting nook at the front.

2 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay20′ × 75′ · 1,500 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

2 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

2 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 2 vehicles + full hobby shop. The 75-ft depth means you can pull a vehicle in, work on it, and still have a second car staged behind.

💡 Pro tip:Two-Lift Capable. Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×75 Commercial Garage for Auto Shops in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Commercial Garage for Auto Shops.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×75 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Commercial Garage for Auto Shops spec sheet.

Width20'
Length75' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Commercial Garage for Auto Shops.

DAILY USEEveryday commercial garage for auto shops
Everyday commercial garage for auto shops
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a commercial garage for auto shops.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommercial garage for auto shops + seasonal storage
commercial garage for auto shops + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×75 Commercial Garage for Auto Shops — what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$467/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×75 commercial garage for auto shops is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $467/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×75?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 75′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Commercial Garage for Auto Shops shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×75 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×75 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×75 Commercial Garage for Auto Shops buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×75 Commercial Garage for Auto Shops

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Commercial Garage for Auto Shops · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×76×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,750+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Commercial Garage for Auto Shops also viewed:

🏢 20×75

Workshop Kit for Tradespeople

20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Kit for Tradespeople →
🏭 20×75

Fabrication Shop

20×75 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏡 20×75

Metal Barndominium Shell

20×75 metal barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →
🌾 20×75

Horse Barn with Stalls

20×75 horse barn with stalls configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →
🏢 20×75

Fleet Garage for Service Vans

20×75 fleet garage for service vans configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vans →
🌾 20×75

Agricultural Barn

20×75 agricultural barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Barn →
🏭 20×75

Equipment Storage Building

20×75 equipment storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Building →
🏢 20×75

Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub

20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub →
🎯 20×75

RV Garage with Workshop

20×75 rv garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage with Workshop →
🏡 20×75

Workshop and Hobby Garage

20×75 workshop and hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop and Hobby Garage →
🏛️ 20×75

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×75 storage building for self-storage operators configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Commercial Garage for Auto Shops questions, answered.

How much does a 20×75 commercial garage for auto shops cost?

A 20×75 commercial garage for auto shops from Steel and Stud starts at $22,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $467/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×75 commercial garage for auto shops price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud commercial garage for auto shops ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×75 commercial garage for auto shops?

Almost always for 1,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud commercial garage for auto shops different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×75 commercial garage for auto shops need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×75 commercial garage for auto shops delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×75 commercial garage for auto shops without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $467/month on a 20×75 commercial garage for auto shops.

What warranty comes with the 20×75 commercial garage for auto shops?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×75 commercial garage for auto shops in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 20×75 commercial garage for auto shops meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Commercial Garage for Auto Shops quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$22,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x75 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,500 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×75 Fabrication Shop

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 75′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×75 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×75 Fabrication Shop | Steel and Stud — From $22,800
12
20×75 Fabrication Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$26,000$22,800SAVE $3,200
or $475/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×75Fabrication Shop
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×75 Fabrication Shop, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Small fabrication shops pick the 20×75 for the long material run: 75 feet handles full sticks of 24-foot tubing with cutting and assembly stations laid out in series. Higher 14-16 ft legs accommodate overhead cranes or.

You're viewing:Fabrication Shop·Size20×75·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$22,800$26,000Save $3,200
or as low as $475/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×75
20×75
this size
$22,800
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Crane-Ready Legs
  • 26 GA Panels
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X75-FABRICATION-SHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your workshop layout.

20 feet wide × 75 feet long. Side-load + walk-in, dust-collection ready. Small fabrication shops pick the 20×75 for the long material run: 75 feet handles full sticks of 24-foot tubing with cutting and assembly stations laid out in series.

Workbench wallTABLE SAW / CENTERLumber / Material rack20′ × 75′ · 1,500 sq ft · workshop layout

Workbench wall · Table saw / Center · Lumber / Material rack

Workbench wall at the front, table saw / center in the middle, lumber / material rack at the rear. Capacity: 1-person serious shop. Higher 14-16 ft legs accommodate overhead cranes or jib hoists rated up to 1 ton.

💡 Pro tip:Crane-Ready Legs. Size affords: dust collection, 220V subpanel, shop sink.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×75 Fabrication Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Fabrication Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×75 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fabrication Shop spec sheet.

Width20'
Length75' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Fabrication Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday fabrication shop
Everyday fabrication shop
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fabrication shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfabrication shop + seasonal storage
fabrication shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×75 Fabrication Shop — what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$475/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×75 fabrication shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $475/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×75?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 75′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Fabrication Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×75 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×75 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×75 Fabrication Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×75 Fabrication Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Fabrication Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×76×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,750+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Fabrication Shop also viewed:

🏢 20×75

Workshop Kit for Tradespeople

20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Kit for Tradespeople →
🏢 20×75

Commercial Garage for Auto Shops

20×75 commercial garage for auto shops configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Garage for Auto Shops →
🏡 20×75

Metal Barndominium Shell

20×75 metal barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →
🌾 20×75

Horse Barn with Stalls

20×75 horse barn with stalls configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →
🏢 20×75

Fleet Garage for Service Vans

20×75 fleet garage for service vans configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vans →
🌾 20×75

Agricultural Barn

20×75 agricultural barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Barn →
🏭 20×75

Equipment Storage Building

20×75 equipment storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Building →
🏢 20×75

Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub

20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub →
🎯 20×75

RV Garage with Workshop

20×75 rv garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage with Workshop →
🏡 20×75

Workshop and Hobby Garage

20×75 workshop and hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop and Hobby Garage →
🏛️ 20×75

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×75 storage building for self-storage operators configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Fabrication Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 20×75 fabrication shop cost?

A 20×75 fabrication shop from Steel and Stud starts at $22,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $475/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×75 fabrication shop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud fabrication shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×75 fabrication shop?

Almost always for 1,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud fabrication shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×75 fabrication shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×75 fabrication shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×75 fabrication shop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $475/month on a 20×75 fabrication shop.

What warranty comes with the 20×75 fabrication shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×75 fabrication shop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 20×75 fabrication shop handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 20×75 fabrication shop ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request — call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Fabrication Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$22,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x75 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,500 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×75 Fabrication Shop

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 75′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×75 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×75 Fabrication Shop | Steel and Stud — From $22,800
12
20×75 Fabrication Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$26,000$22,800SAVE $3,200
or $475/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×75Fabrication Shop
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×75 Fabrication Shop, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Small fabrication shops pick the 20×75 for the long material run: 75 feet handles full sticks of 24-foot tubing with cutting and assembly stations laid out in series. Higher 14-16 ft legs accommodate overhead cranes or.

You're viewing:Fabrication Shop·Size20×75·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$22,800$26,000Save $3,200
or as low as $475/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×75
20×75
this size
$22,800
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Crane-Ready Legs
  • 26 GA Panels
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X75-FABRICATION-SHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your workshop layout.

20 feet wide × 75 feet long. Side-load + walk-in, dust-collection ready. Small fabrication shops pick the 20×75 for the long material run: 75 feet handles full sticks of 24-foot tubing with cutting and assembly stations laid out in series.

Workbench wallTABLE SAW / CENTERLumber / Material rack20′ × 75′ · 1,500 sq ft · workshop layout

Workbench wall · Table saw / Center · Lumber / Material rack

Workbench wall at the front, table saw / center in the middle, lumber / material rack at the rear. Capacity: 1-person serious shop. Higher 14-16 ft legs accommodate overhead cranes or jib hoists rated up to 1 ton.

💡 Pro tip:Crane-Ready Legs. Size affords: dust collection, 220V subpanel, shop sink.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×75 Fabrication Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Fabrication Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×75 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fabrication Shop spec sheet.

Width20'
Length75' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Fabrication Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday fabrication shop
Everyday fabrication shop
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fabrication shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfabrication shop + seasonal storage
fabrication shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×75 Fabrication Shop — what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$475/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×75 fabrication shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $475/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×75?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 75′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Fabrication Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×75 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×75 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×75 Fabrication Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×75 Fabrication Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Fabrication Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×76×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,750+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Fabrication Shop also viewed:

🏢 20×75

Workshop Kit for Tradespeople

20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Kit for Tradespeople →
🏢 20×75

Commercial Garage for Auto Shops

20×75 commercial garage for auto shops configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Garage for Auto Shops →
🏡 20×75

Metal Barndominium Shell

20×75 metal barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →
🌾 20×75

Horse Barn with Stalls

20×75 horse barn with stalls configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →
🏢 20×75

Fleet Garage for Service Vans

20×75 fleet garage for service vans configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vans →
🌾 20×75

Agricultural Barn

20×75 agricultural barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Barn →
🏭 20×75

Equipment Storage Building

20×75 equipment storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Building →
🏢 20×75

Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub

20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub →
🎯 20×75

RV Garage with Workshop

20×75 rv garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage with Workshop →
🏡 20×75

Workshop and Hobby Garage

20×75 workshop and hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop and Hobby Garage →
🏛️ 20×75

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×75 storage building for self-storage operators configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Fabrication Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 20×75 fabrication shop cost?

A 20×75 fabrication shop from Steel and Stud starts at $22,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $475/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×75 fabrication shop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud fabrication shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×75 fabrication shop?

Almost always for 1,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud fabrication shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×75 fabrication shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×75 fabrication shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×75 fabrication shop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $475/month on a 20×75 fabrication shop.

What warranty comes with the 20×75 fabrication shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×75 fabrication shop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 20×75 fabrication shop handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 20×75 fabrication shop ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request — call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Fabrication Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$22,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x75 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,500 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×75 Metal Barndominium Shell

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 75′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×75 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×75 Metal Barndominium Shell | Steel and Stud — From $20,550
12
20×75 Metal Barndominium Shell
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$23,450$20,550SAVE $2,900
or $428/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×75Metal Barndominium Shell
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×75 Metal Barndominium Shell, built for daily backyard use.

Barndo builders use the 20×75 footprint for a long, narrow residential layout: two bedrooms and a bath at one end, an open kitchen and great room at the other, with a small attached garage bay through a side wall. 1,500.

You're viewing:Metal Barndominium Shell·Size20×75·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$20,550$23,450Save $2,900
or as low as $428/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×75
20×75
this size
$20,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • Spray-Foam Ready
  • Vertical Roof
  • Barndo Shell Pricing
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X75-METAL-BARNDOMINIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your barndominium shell.

20 feet wide × 75 feet long. Split layout — living one end, shop the other. Barndo builders use the 20×75 footprint for a long, narrow residential layout: two bedrooms and a bath at one end, an open kitchen and great room at the other, with a small attached garage bay through a side wall.

2-bed sleeping wingGreat room + kitchenGarage / shop bay20′ × 75′ · 1,500 sq ft · barndominium shell

2-bed sleeping wing · Great room + kitchen · Garage / shop bay

2-bed sleeping wing at the front, great room + kitchen in the middle, garage / shop bay at the rear. Capacity: 2-bed home + attached shop bay. 1,500 sq ft is the sweet spot for a one-bedroom or two-bedroom barndominium without a loft.

💡 Pro tip:Barndo Shell Pricing. Size affords: shop partition wall, porch framing, spray-foam package.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×75 Metal Barndominium Shell in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Metal Barndominium Shell.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×75 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Metal Barndominium Shell spec sheet.

Width20'
Length75' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Metal Barndominium Shell.

DAILY USEEveryday metal barndominium shell
Everyday metal barndominium shell
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a metal barndominium shell.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmetal barndominium shell + seasonal storage
metal barndominium shell + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×75 Metal Barndominium Shell — what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$428/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×75 metal barndominium shell is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $428/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×75?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 75′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Metal Barndominium Shell shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×75 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×75 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×75 Metal Barndominium Shell buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×75 Metal Barndominium Shell

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Metal Barndominium Shell · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×76×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,750+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Metal Barndominium Shell also viewed:

🏢 20×75

Workshop Kit for Tradespeople

20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Kit for Tradespeople →
🏢 20×75

Commercial Garage for Auto Shops

20×75 commercial garage for auto shops configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Garage for Auto Shops →
🏭 20×75

Fabrication Shop

20×75 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🌾 20×75

Horse Barn with Stalls

20×75 horse barn with stalls configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →
🏢 20×75

Fleet Garage for Service Vans

20×75 fleet garage for service vans configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vans →
🌾 20×75

Agricultural Barn

20×75 agricultural barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Barn →
🏭 20×75

Equipment Storage Building

20×75 equipment storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Building →
🏢 20×75

Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub

20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub →
🎯 20×75

RV Garage with Workshop

20×75 rv garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage with Workshop →
🏡 20×75

Workshop and Hobby Garage

20×75 workshop and hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop and Hobby Garage →
🏛️ 20×75

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×75 storage building for self-storage operators configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Metal Barndominium Shell questions, answered.

How much does a 20×75 metal barndominium shell cost?

A 20×75 metal barndominium shell from Steel and Stud starts at $20,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $428/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×75 metal barndominium shell price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud metal barndominium shell ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×75 metal barndominium shell?

Almost always for 1,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud metal barndominium shell different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×75 metal barndominium shell need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×75 metal barndominium shell delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×75 metal barndominium shell without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $428/month on a 20×75 metal barndominium shell.

What warranty comes with the 20×75 metal barndominium shell?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×75 metal barndominium shell in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×75 metal barndominium shell add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×75 metal barndominium shell typically adds $12,000–$18,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Metal Barndominium Shell quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$20,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x75 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,500 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×75 Metal Barndominium Shell

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 75′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×75 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×75 Metal Barndominium Shell | Steel and Stud — From $20,550
12
20×75 Metal Barndominium Shell
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$23,450$20,550SAVE $2,900
or $428/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×75Metal Barndominium Shell
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×75 Metal Barndominium Shell, built for daily backyard use.

Barndo builders use the 20×75 footprint for a long, narrow residential layout: two bedrooms and a bath at one end, an open kitchen and great room at the other, with a small attached garage bay through a side wall. 1,500.

You're viewing:Metal Barndominium Shell·Size20×75·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$20,550$23,450Save $2,900
or as low as $428/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×75
20×75
this size
$20,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • Spray-Foam Ready
  • Vertical Roof
  • Barndo Shell Pricing
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X75-METAL-BARNDOMINIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your barndominium shell.

20 feet wide × 75 feet long. Split layout — living one end, shop the other. Barndo builders use the 20×75 footprint for a long, narrow residential layout: two bedrooms and a bath at one end, an open kitchen and great room at the other, with a small attached garage bay through a side wall.

2-bed sleeping wingGreat room + kitchenGarage / shop bay20′ × 75′ · 1,500 sq ft · barndominium shell

2-bed sleeping wing · Great room + kitchen · Garage / shop bay

2-bed sleeping wing at the front, great room + kitchen in the middle, garage / shop bay at the rear. Capacity: 2-bed home + attached shop bay. 1,500 sq ft is the sweet spot for a one-bedroom or two-bedroom barndominium without a loft.

💡 Pro tip:Barndo Shell Pricing. Size affords: shop partition wall, porch framing, spray-foam package.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×75 Metal Barndominium Shell in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Metal Barndominium Shell.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×75 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Metal Barndominium Shell spec sheet.

Width20'
Length75' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Metal Barndominium Shell.

DAILY USEEveryday metal barndominium shell
Everyday metal barndominium shell
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a metal barndominium shell.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmetal barndominium shell + seasonal storage
metal barndominium shell + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×75 Metal Barndominium Shell — what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$428/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×75 metal barndominium shell is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $428/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×75?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 75′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Metal Barndominium Shell shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×75 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×75 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×75 Metal Barndominium Shell buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×75 Metal Barndominium Shell

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Metal Barndominium Shell · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×76×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,750+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Metal Barndominium Shell also viewed:

🏢 20×75

Workshop Kit for Tradespeople

20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Kit for Tradespeople →
🏢 20×75

Commercial Garage for Auto Shops

20×75 commercial garage for auto shops configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Garage for Auto Shops →
🏭 20×75

Fabrication Shop

20×75 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🌾 20×75

Horse Barn with Stalls

20×75 horse barn with stalls configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →
🏢 20×75

Fleet Garage for Service Vans

20×75 fleet garage for service vans configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vans →
🌾 20×75

Agricultural Barn

20×75 agricultural barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Barn →
🏭 20×75

Equipment Storage Building

20×75 equipment storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Building →
🏢 20×75

Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub

20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub →
🎯 20×75

RV Garage with Workshop

20×75 rv garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage with Workshop →
🏡 20×75

Workshop and Hobby Garage

20×75 workshop and hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop and Hobby Garage →
🏛️ 20×75

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×75 storage building for self-storage operators configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Metal Barndominium Shell questions, answered.

How much does a 20×75 metal barndominium shell cost?

A 20×75 metal barndominium shell from Steel and Stud starts at $20,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $428/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×75 metal barndominium shell price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud metal barndominium shell ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×75 metal barndominium shell?

Almost always for 1,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud metal barndominium shell different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×75 metal barndominium shell need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×75 metal barndominium shell delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×75 metal barndominium shell without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $428/month on a 20×75 metal barndominium shell.

What warranty comes with the 20×75 metal barndominium shell?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×75 metal barndominium shell in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×75 metal barndominium shell add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×75 metal barndominium shell typically adds $12,000–$18,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Metal Barndominium Shell quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$20,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x75 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,500 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×75 Horse Barn with Stalls

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 75′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×75 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×75 Horse Barn with Stalls | Steel and Stud — From $21,200
12
20×75 Horse Barn with Stalls
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$24,150$21,200SAVE $2,950
or $442/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×75Horse Barn with Stalls
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×75 Horse Barn with Stalls, built for farm and ranch demands.

Horse owners run a center aisle down the 75-ft length with five 20×75 stalls along one side and a tack room, wash bay, and feed storage along the other. The 20-ft width keeps the aisle workable without forcing a wider.

You're viewing:Horse Barn with Stalls·Size20×75·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$21,200$24,150Save $2,950
or as low as $442/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×75
20×75
this size
$21,200
24×75
wider
$27,250
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • Sliding Barn Doors
  • 10' Walls
  • Galvalume Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X75-HORSE-BARN-STALLBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your shedrow horse barn.

20 feet wide × 75 feet long. Center-aisle layout with cross-ties. Horse owners run a center aisle down the 75-ft length with five 20×75 stalls along one side and a tack room, wash bay, and feed storage along the other.

5 stalls10-FT CENTER AISLETack + Feed room20′ × 75′ · 1,500 sq ft · shedrow horse barn

5 stalls · 10-ft center aisle · Tack + Feed room

5 stalls at the front, 10-ft center aisle in the middle, tack + feed room at the rear. Capacity: 5 horses + tack + feed. The 20-ft width keeps the aisle workable without forcing a wider clear-span quote.

💡 Pro tip:Sliding Barn Doors. Size affords: dutch doors per stall, wash bay rough-in, fly system.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×75 Horse Barn with Stalls in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Horse Barn with Stalls.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×75 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Horse Barn with Stalls spec sheet.

Width20'
Length75' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Horse Barn with Stalls.

DAILY USEEveryday horse barn with stalls
Everyday horse barn with stalls
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a horse barn with stalls.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhorse barn with stalls + seasonal storage
horse barn with stalls + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×75 Horse Barn with Stalls — what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$442/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×75 horse barn with stalls is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $442/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×75?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 75′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Horse Barn with Stalls shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×75 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×75 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×75 Horse Barn with Stalls buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×75 Horse Barn with Stalls

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Horse Barn with Stalls · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×76×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,750+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Horse Barn with Stalls also viewed:

🏢 20×75

Workshop Kit for Tradespeople

20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Kit for Tradespeople →
🏢 20×75

Commercial Garage for Auto Shops

20×75 commercial garage for auto shops configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Garage for Auto Shops →
🏭 20×75

Fabrication Shop

20×75 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏡 20×75

Metal Barndominium Shell

20×75 metal barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →
🏢 20×75

Fleet Garage for Service Vans

20×75 fleet garage for service vans configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vans →
🌾 20×75

Agricultural Barn

20×75 agricultural barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Barn →
🏭 20×75

Equipment Storage Building

20×75 equipment storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Building →
🏢 20×75

Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub

20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub →
🎯 20×75

RV Garage with Workshop

20×75 rv garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage with Workshop →
🏡 20×75

Workshop and Hobby Garage

20×75 workshop and hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop and Hobby Garage →
🏛️ 20×75

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×75 storage building for self-storage operators configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Horse Barn with Stalls questions, answered.

How much does a 20×75 horse barn with stalls cost?

A 20×75 horse barn with stalls from Steel and Stud starts at $21,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $442/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×75 horse barn with stalls price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud horse barn with stalls ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×75 horse barn with stalls?

Almost always for 1,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud horse barn with stalls different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×75 horse barn with stalls need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×75 horse barn with stalls delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×75 horse barn with stalls without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $442/month on a 20×75 horse barn with stalls.

What warranty comes with the 20×75 horse barn with stalls?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×75 horse barn with stalls in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 20×75 horse barn with stalls stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Horse Barn with Stalls quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$21,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x75 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,500 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×75 Horse Barn with Stalls

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 75′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×75 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×75 Horse Barn with Stalls | Steel and Stud — From $21,200
12
20×75 Horse Barn with Stalls
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$24,150$21,200SAVE $2,950
or $442/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×75Horse Barn with Stalls
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×75 Horse Barn with Stalls, built for farm and ranch demands.

Horse owners run a center aisle down the 75-ft length with five 20×75 stalls along one side and a tack room, wash bay, and feed storage along the other. The 20-ft width keeps the aisle workable without forcing a wider.

You're viewing:Horse Barn with Stalls·Size20×75·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$21,200$24,150Save $2,950
or as low as $442/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×75
20×75
this size
$21,200
24×75
wider
$27,250
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • Sliding Barn Doors
  • 10' Walls
  • Galvalume Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X75-HORSE-BARN-STALLBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your shedrow horse barn.

20 feet wide × 75 feet long. Center-aisle layout with cross-ties. Horse owners run a center aisle down the 75-ft length with five 20×75 stalls along one side and a tack room, wash bay, and feed storage along the other.

5 stalls10-FT CENTER AISLETack + Feed room20′ × 75′ · 1,500 sq ft · shedrow horse barn

5 stalls · 10-ft center aisle · Tack + Feed room

5 stalls at the front, 10-ft center aisle in the middle, tack + feed room at the rear. Capacity: 5 horses + tack + feed. The 20-ft width keeps the aisle workable without forcing a wider clear-span quote.

💡 Pro tip:Sliding Barn Doors. Size affords: dutch doors per stall, wash bay rough-in, fly system.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×75 Horse Barn with Stalls in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Horse Barn with Stalls.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×75 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Horse Barn with Stalls spec sheet.

Width20'
Length75' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Horse Barn with Stalls.

DAILY USEEveryday horse barn with stalls
Everyday horse barn with stalls
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a horse barn with stalls.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhorse barn with stalls + seasonal storage
horse barn with stalls + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×75 Horse Barn with Stalls — what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$442/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×75 horse barn with stalls is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $442/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×75?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 75′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Horse Barn with Stalls shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×75 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×75 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×75 Horse Barn with Stalls buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×75 Horse Barn with Stalls

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Horse Barn with Stalls · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×76×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,750+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Horse Barn with Stalls also viewed:

🏢 20×75

Workshop Kit for Tradespeople

20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Kit for Tradespeople →
🏢 20×75

Commercial Garage for Auto Shops

20×75 commercial garage for auto shops configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Garage for Auto Shops →
🏭 20×75

Fabrication Shop

20×75 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏡 20×75

Metal Barndominium Shell

20×75 metal barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →
🏢 20×75

Fleet Garage for Service Vans

20×75 fleet garage for service vans configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vans →
🌾 20×75

Agricultural Barn

20×75 agricultural barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Barn →
🏭 20×75

Equipment Storage Building

20×75 equipment storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Building →
🏢 20×75

Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub

20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub →
🎯 20×75

RV Garage with Workshop

20×75 rv garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage with Workshop →
🏡 20×75

Workshop and Hobby Garage

20×75 workshop and hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop and Hobby Garage →
🏛️ 20×75

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×75 storage building for self-storage operators configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Horse Barn with Stalls questions, answered.

How much does a 20×75 horse barn with stalls cost?

A 20×75 horse barn with stalls from Steel and Stud starts at $21,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $442/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×75 horse barn with stalls price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud horse barn with stalls ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×75 horse barn with stalls?

Almost always for 1,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud horse barn with stalls different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×75 horse barn with stalls need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×75 horse barn with stalls delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×75 horse barn with stalls without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $442/month on a 20×75 horse barn with stalls.

What warranty comes with the 20×75 horse barn with stalls?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×75 horse barn with stalls in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 20×75 horse barn with stalls stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Horse Barn with Stalls quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$21,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x75 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,500 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×75 Fleet Garage for Service Vans

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 75′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×75 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×75 Fleet Garage for Service Vans | Steel and Stud — From $22,400
12
20×75 Fleet Garage for Service Vans
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$25,550$22,400SAVE $3,150
or $467/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×75Fleet Garage for Service Vans
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×75 Fleet Garage for Service Vans, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Plumbing, HVAC, and electrical contractors park four full-size service vans end-to-end inside a 20×75 fleet garage and still have working room. Add a partition at the rear for a small parts and tool room. Insulated.

You're viewing:Fleet Garage for Service Vans·Size20×75·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$22,400$25,550Save $3,150
or as low as $467/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×75
20×75
this size
$22,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • R-13 Insulation
  • Fits 4 Service Vans
  • 10x8 Roll-Ups
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X75-FLEET-GARAGE-SERBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your fleet-garage layout.

20 feet wide × 75 feet long. 14-ft doors for cube trucks and ambulances. Plumbing, HVAC, and electrical contractors park four full-size service vans end-to-end inside a 20×75 fleet garage and still have working room.

1 drive-in baysWash / service laneParts + dispatch office20′ × 75′ · 1,500 sq ft · fleet-garage layout

1 drive-in bays · Wash / service lane · Parts + dispatch office

1 drive-in bays at the front, wash / service lane in the middle, parts + dispatch office at the rear. Capacity: 1-vehicle fleet under roof. Add a partition at the rear for a small parts and tool room.

💡 Pro tip:Fits 4 Service Vans. Size affords: floor drains per bay, compressor + lube reels, dispatch office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×75 Fleet Garage for Service Vans in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Fleet Garage for Service Vans.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×75 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fleet Garage for Service Vans spec sheet.

Width20'
Length75' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Fleet Garage for Service Vans.

DAILY USEEveryday fleet garage for service vans
Everyday fleet garage for service vans
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fleet garage for service vans.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfleet garage for service vans + seasonal storage
fleet garage for service vans + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×75 Fleet Garage for Service Vans — what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$467/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×75 fleet garage for service vans is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $467/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×75?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 75′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Fleet Garage for Service Vans shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×75 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×75 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×75 Fleet Garage for Service Vans buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×75 Fleet Garage for Service Vans

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Fleet Garage for Service Vans · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×76×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,750+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Fleet Garage for Service Vans also viewed:

🏢 20×75

Workshop Kit for Tradespeople

20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Kit for Tradespeople →
🏢 20×75

Commercial Garage for Auto Shops

20×75 commercial garage for auto shops configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Garage for Auto Shops →
🏭 20×75

Fabrication Shop

20×75 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏡 20×75

Metal Barndominium Shell

20×75 metal barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →
🌾 20×75

Horse Barn with Stalls

20×75 horse barn with stalls configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →
🌾 20×75

Agricultural Barn

20×75 agricultural barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Barn →
🏭 20×75

Equipment Storage Building

20×75 equipment storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Building →
🏢 20×75

Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub

20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub →
🎯 20×75

RV Garage with Workshop

20×75 rv garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage with Workshop →
🏡 20×75

Workshop and Hobby Garage

20×75 workshop and hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop and Hobby Garage →
🏛️ 20×75

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×75 storage building for self-storage operators configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Fleet Garage for Service Vans questions, answered.

How much does a 20×75 fleet garage for service vans cost?

A 20×75 fleet garage for service vans from Steel and Stud starts at $22,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $467/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×75 fleet garage for service vans price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud fleet garage for service vans ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×75 fleet garage for service vans?

Almost always for 1,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud fleet garage for service vans different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×75 fleet garage for service vans need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×75 fleet garage for service vans delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×75 fleet garage for service vans without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $467/month on a 20×75 fleet garage for service vans.

What warranty comes with the 20×75 fleet garage for service vans?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×75 fleet garage for service vans in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 20×75 fleet garage for service vans meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Fleet Garage for Service Vans quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$22,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x75 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,500 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×75 Fleet Garage for Service Vans

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 75′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×75 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×75 Fleet Garage for Service Vans | Steel and Stud — From $22,400
12
20×75 Fleet Garage for Service Vans
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$25,550$22,400SAVE $3,150
or $467/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×75Fleet Garage for Service Vans
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×75 Fleet Garage for Service Vans, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Plumbing, HVAC, and electrical contractors park four full-size service vans end-to-end inside a 20×75 fleet garage and still have working room. Add a partition at the rear for a small parts and tool room. Insulated.

You're viewing:Fleet Garage for Service Vans·Size20×75·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$22,400$25,550Save $3,150
or as low as $467/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×75
20×75
this size
$22,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • R-13 Insulation
  • Fits 4 Service Vans
  • 10x8 Roll-Ups
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X75-FLEET-GARAGE-SERBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your fleet-garage layout.

20 feet wide × 75 feet long. 14-ft doors for cube trucks and ambulances. Plumbing, HVAC, and electrical contractors park four full-size service vans end-to-end inside a 20×75 fleet garage and still have working room.

1 drive-in baysWash / service laneParts + dispatch office20′ × 75′ · 1,500 sq ft · fleet-garage layout

1 drive-in bays · Wash / service lane · Parts + dispatch office

1 drive-in bays at the front, wash / service lane in the middle, parts + dispatch office at the rear. Capacity: 1-vehicle fleet under roof. Add a partition at the rear for a small parts and tool room.

💡 Pro tip:Fits 4 Service Vans. Size affords: floor drains per bay, compressor + lube reels, dispatch office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×75 Fleet Garage for Service Vans in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Fleet Garage for Service Vans.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×75 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fleet Garage for Service Vans spec sheet.

Width20'
Length75' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Fleet Garage for Service Vans.

DAILY USEEveryday fleet garage for service vans
Everyday fleet garage for service vans
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fleet garage for service vans.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfleet garage for service vans + seasonal storage
fleet garage for service vans + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×75 Fleet Garage for Service Vans — what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$467/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×75 fleet garage for service vans is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $467/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×75?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 75′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Fleet Garage for Service Vans shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×75 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×75 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×75 Fleet Garage for Service Vans buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×75 Fleet Garage for Service Vans

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Fleet Garage for Service Vans · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×76×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,750+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Fleet Garage for Service Vans also viewed:

🏢 20×75

Workshop Kit for Tradespeople

20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Kit for Tradespeople →
🏢 20×75

Commercial Garage for Auto Shops

20×75 commercial garage for auto shops configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Garage for Auto Shops →
🏭 20×75

Fabrication Shop

20×75 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏡 20×75

Metal Barndominium Shell

20×75 metal barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →
🌾 20×75

Horse Barn with Stalls

20×75 horse barn with stalls configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →
🌾 20×75

Agricultural Barn

20×75 agricultural barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Barn →
🏭 20×75

Equipment Storage Building

20×75 equipment storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Building →
🏢 20×75

Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub

20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub →
🎯 20×75

RV Garage with Workshop

20×75 rv garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage with Workshop →
🏡 20×75

Workshop and Hobby Garage

20×75 workshop and hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop and Hobby Garage →
🏛️ 20×75

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×75 storage building for self-storage operators configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Fleet Garage for Service Vans questions, answered.

How much does a 20×75 fleet garage for service vans cost?

A 20×75 fleet garage for service vans from Steel and Stud starts at $22,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $467/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×75 fleet garage for service vans price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud fleet garage for service vans ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×75 fleet garage for service vans?

Almost always for 1,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud fleet garage for service vans different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×75 fleet garage for service vans need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×75 fleet garage for service vans delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×75 fleet garage for service vans without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $467/month on a 20×75 fleet garage for service vans.

What warranty comes with the 20×75 fleet garage for service vans?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×75 fleet garage for service vans in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 20×75 fleet garage for service vans meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Fleet Garage for Service Vans quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$22,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

Not Sure Which Size? Build Your Carport in 3D and See Your Price Instantly

Flexible Payment Options

3 Ways to Pay - Pick What Works

No need to pay full price today. Choose from standard deposit, easy monthly financing, or rent-to-own with zero credit check. Every option includes free delivery & professional installation.

Monthly Financing

Affordable monthly payments, competitive rates.

Down PaymentVaries by lender
MonthlyAs low as $89/mo
Terms12 to 72 months
Credit CheckRequired
Best ForLarger structures
Check My Rate

Rent-to-Own

No credit check. Low monthly payments.

Down PaymentFirst month only
MonthlyAs low as $49/mo
Terms24 to 60 months
Credit CheckNot required
Best ForBudget-friendly option
Start RTO Application
Instant Estimate

Metal Carport Price Calculator

Enter your desired dimensions and options below for an instant price estimate. Contact us for a certified, site-specific quote.

ESTIMATED PRICE RANGE $9,200 - $10,300

Estimate based on standard configuration. Contact us for exact certified pricing.

View Presets, Inventory Matches & Details

Presets & Calculator Data

Custom estimate

Enter a size and state to generate an estimated range and route correctly.

Size Selected 24 × 40 × 10
Floor Area 960 sq ft
Location FactorStandard
Inventory MatchNo exact match
Recommended Path3D Builder

Inventory Alternatives

4-8 Weeks Current Lead Time — 127 Carports Ordered This Month Alone

Why Steel and Stud

6 Reasons to Choose a Steel Carport

A prefabricated steel carport is the most cost-effective way to protect your vehicles, boats and equipment. Here is why 15,000+ property owners chose Steel and Stud.

🧮

Free Installation Included

Every tubular steel carport order includes free professional installation by a certified crew across all 48 contiguous states. No hidden assembly fees. Just confirm your site is level and we handle the rest.

🌟

20-Year Warranty on 12-Gauge

Our 12-gauge galvanized steel frames carry a 20-year limited rust-through warranty backed by the manufacturer. 14-gauge frames include a full workmanship warranty. Steel structures genuinely last decades.

💰

Factory-Direct Pricing

We work directly with multiple manufacturers, cutting out distributor markups. In most cases our prices beat the manufacturer's own direct pricing. 40-60% less than comparable wood or concrete construction.

🌞

12 Color Options Included

Choose from 12 standard powder-coat colors at no additional cost. Galvanized and primer finishes also available. Your color choice will not affect your price or lead time.

Engineered for Your Climate

All structures are designed to meet local wind speed and snow load requirements. 12-gauge certified frames are available for high-wind coastal zones, heavy-snow mountain regions and tornado-prone states.

🔭

Multiple Manufacturers, One Source

We partner with multiple vetted manufacturers nationwide so you always get the closest installer, the fastest lead time, and competitive pricing for your specific location and climate zone.

Choose the Right Roof

Regular vs A-Frame vs Vertical Roof Carport

Selecting the right roof style affects weather performance, aesthetics, price and longevity. Here is how each option compares across key factors.

Regular / Horizontal

Most affordable, simple design

Lowest starting price
Fastest lead time
Moderate rain and snow shedding
Horizontal roof panels
Not ideal for heavy snow areas
Best for mild climates

Vertical Roof

Best performance, highest durability

Superior snow and rain shedding
Panels run vertically top-to-bottom
No standing water or debris ponding
Ideal for heavy snow regions
Price premium (+15%)
Recommended for all climates
Verified Reviews

What Carport Owners Say

Real customers, real installs. See why 15,000+ property owners chose Steel and Stud for their metal carport.

★★★★★
4.8 out of 5 based on 2,847 verified customer reviews
★★★★★

"All my questions were answered and I believe I got the best possible deal. The installation went very smoothly and was completed in one day even though scheduled to take two. The crew of four arrived at 8AM and worked through to 10PM."

VB
Verified Buyer
Verified Customer
Steel Garage
★★★★★

"I had a tight schedule. Bill kept in touch and did everything that he promised."

RS
Ron Sigrist
Verified Customer
Metal Carport
★★★★★

"I ordered two carports for the Healthy Schools Healthy Communities grant in Cabool, MO. Bill went above and beyond — thorough on every detail, called me right back, walked me through the whole order. He even followed up on instructions for the slab pour."

HS
Grant Coordinator
Cabool, MO
Metal Carports
Common Questions

Metal Carport FAQ

Everything you need to know before ordering your steel carport: pricing, installation, permits, warranties, anchoring and dimensions.

Although this can be done with one person, we recommend having at least two people on hand to ensure safety. You can enlist the help of as many people as you like. All tubular steel orders from Steel and Stud include professional installation by a certified crew, so you do not need to self-install unless you specifically choose a DIY kit.

Carports and More Inc. has manufacturers that install in 48 contiguous states. Parts of some states are not covered by the manufacturer used for online pricing. If an order is placed and your location is not in a covered area, we will call you with the correct pricing for your area before proceeding.

Absolutely. You can install the building yourself. In most states, there is a 5% discount for self-installed buildings. The materials can be delivered to your location or picked up at the nearest factory. Contact us for current availability and self-install options in your state.

Manufacturers aim to install units within a 4-week period from the time an approved order is received. In some cases it is done sooner; however, it can take longer depending on the time of year, your location, and seasonal demand. Areas with extreme winter weather may close temporarily. Buildings over 24 feet wide require special construction and can take longer to manufacture.

Most standard carport units are constructed in just a few hours. It may take up to two days depending on the size and complexity of the building. Large triple-wide or commercial-span carports may require a second day for proper installation and inspection.

The key to a successful installation is a flat, level surface. Site preparation and building permits are the responsibility of the customer. You have approximately 2 to 3 inches of adjustment available during installation to account for minor grade differences. If your lot is significantly out of level, materials to level the site must be on hand when the crew arrives.

Re-bar and pin anchors (1/2-inch diameter, 36-inch long) are included for ground and asphalt installations. Concrete anchor bolts are used on concrete slabs at no extra charge. Mobile home auger anchors are available for ground installation at an additional cost. In several states, units enclosed on three sides require a minimum of four mobile home augers for ground installations.

Yes. You have 12 standard colors to choose from at no additional charge. Color selection does not affect your price. Galvanized and primer finishes are also available. Your color selection is made at the time of order and cannot be changed after fabrication begins.

Permit requirements vary by city, county and state. You should contact your local building department before ordering. All permit requirements such as set-backs must be resolved before ordering because once engineering plans are sent, your deposit becomes non-refundable. Generic engineered plans are available in most states. States requiring building-specific plans and calculations include CO, ID, MT, ND, NE, NJ, OR, SD, UT, WA and WY. Contact us if you have questions about your area.

The vertical roof allows water, snow and debris to run off quickly without ponding. The vertical panel orientation prevents accumulation and is especially recommended in high snow-load areas. If you are in a state with significant annual snowfall or heavy seasonal rain, the vertical roof upgrade is strongly recommended even though it carries a modest price premium.

Sizes are shown as width x length x leg height. Width is measured from outside to outside of each base rail. Length is measured by the roof metal, which includes a 6-inch overhang on each end, so the base rail is 1 foot shorter than the roof length. Height is measured by the actual leg on the outer wall. Standard-style roof units will be 1 foot taller at the sidewall than the selected leg height.

The frames are available in either 14-gauge or 12-gauge galvanized steel tubing. The roof, side and end panels are 29-gauge steel with a painted finish. Galvanized frames provide corrosion resistance. 12-gauge is 2.5mm thick; 14-gauge is 1.9mm thick. Lower gauge equals thicker, stronger steel.

14-gauge frame units carry a 30-day workmanship warranty. 12-gauge frames include both the 30-day workmanship warranty and a 20-year limited rust-through warranty on the framing, assuming normal user care and maintenance. Warranty coverage begins on the date of installation.

Yes; however, your deposit may not be fully refundable. You have 3 days from the date of order confirmation to cancel and receive a full refund. Cancellations must be in writing. After 3 days, deposits may be applied as credit toward any future purchase within 3 years. Deposits on custom-size units are non-refundable. Installation timing delays alone are not a valid reason for cancellation.

No. In most cases our prices are the same as or lower than ordering direct from the manufacturer. We work with multiple manufacturers and can often source your structure from the most competitive option for your location, size and timing, something a single manufacturer cannot do for you.

Yes. Extensions, lean-tos, sidewalls and doors can be added after installation, though there may be an additional service charge. If you plan to eventually enclose a carport with walk-in or roll-up doors, your original leg height must be 6 feet or taller to allow for standard door frames.

Slab requirements vary by manufacturer. Please contact us before pouring your concrete slab to confirm exact dimensions and anchor bolt placement for your specific carport model. Pouring the wrong size slab can delay installation.

12-foot legs are standard and available on all units. Longer legs may be available for special applications such as RV clearance or commercial-height requirements. Contact us if you need legs taller than 12 feet and we will confirm availability for your chosen structure type.

The balance due is paid directly to the manufacturer after your carport is fully installed and you are satisfied. The manufacturer accepts cash, check and credit card. They will confirm accepted payment methods when they contact you to schedule installation. PayPal is not accepted directly by the manufacturer but can be arranged through Steel and Stud with applicable processing fees. If you prefer not to pay the full balance at once, ask about our monthly financing or rent-to-own (RTO) options — both are available and let you own your carport with as little as the first month's payment down.

Yes — Steel and Stud offers three flexible payment paths: (1) Standard Payment — pay a deposit now, balance after install, zero interest; (2) Monthly Financing — competitive rates from $89/mo over 12–72 months with a soft credit pull; and (3) Rent-to-Own (RTO) — as low as $49/mo with no credit check required, first month's payment as the only down payment, and an early buyout option available at any time. RTO is available on most residential carport sizes. View all financing options →

Gauge refers to the thickness of the steel tubing: lower gauge means thicker steel. 12-gauge is 2.5mm thick and is the stronger, more durable option backed by a 20-year rust-through warranty. 14-gauge is 1.9mm thick, lighter and more affordable, carrying a 30-day workmanship warranty. For heavy snow loads, high winds or long-term investment, 12-gauge is always recommended.

Standard single-car carports (12x21, 15x21) start at $1,195 with free delivery and installation on tubular steel orders. Two-car carports (18x21, 20x21) range from $1,595 to $2,595 depending on roof style and gauge. Triple-wide carports (24x29 and larger) start around $3,895. Large commercial spans (20x38+, 24x45+) start at $5,195 and up. Contact us for a precise quote including your location, size and options.

Get Your Free Quote

Request a Free Carport Quote

Tell us about your project and a building specialist will contact you within 2 hours with a personalized, no-obligation price quote.

Why Request a Quote?

Fast ResponseAverage response time under 2 hours. Most quotes same day.
No Hidden FeesYour quote includes all standard features. Tubular orders include delivery and installation.
Low Deposit to StartDeposit varies by project scope. Balance due only after installation.
Zero ObligationGet your quote, compare options, decide when you are ready.
1-877-275-7048 Mon to Fri 8AM to 6PM EST

Metal Carport Sizes and Dimensions Guide

Metal carport dimensions follow a standard width x length x leg height format. Width runs from 10 feet to 40 feet for standard tubular steel units. Length is effectively unlimited in increments. Leg height starts at 6 feet for standard single-car carports and goes up to 12 feet as a standard option, with taller legs available on request.

Single-car carports (12 to 15 feet wide, 21 feet long) are the most affordable option starting at $1,195. Two-car carports (18 to 22 feet wide) are the most popular category, covering two standard vehicles with room to open doors. Triple-wide carports (24+ feet wide) accommodate three vehicles, trucks, boats or large equipment.

When planning your site, remember that the base rail is 1 foot shorter than the roof length due to 6-inch overhangs on each end. If you need exactly 40 feet of enclosed coverage, order a 41-foot length carport. Contact our team to confirm the right dimensions before ordering.

How Much Does a Metal Carport Cost in 2026?

Metal carport prices in 2026 range from $1,195 for a basic 12x21 single-car carport up to $9,000 or more for a large 30x50 commercial-span structure. All tubular steel carport prices from Steel and Stud include free delivery and professional installation.

Key pricing factors include: Width (wider carports cost more per linear foot), Length (additional bays add proportional cost), Leg Height (taller legs cost more), Roof Style (vertical adds ~15% over regular), and Frame Gauge (12-gauge adds ~12% over 14-gauge but adds a 20-year warranty).

DIY carport kits cost less because installation labor is excluded, but most property owners find the free professional installation included in tubular steel orders to be a significant value. A crew that installs 50 carports per week consistently outperforms a first-time DIY attempt.

Metal Carport Installation: What to Expect

After your order is confirmed and your deposit placed, the manufacturer assigns an installation crew for your region. Current lead times run 4 to 8 weeks depending on your location, structure size and seasonal demand. You will be contacted within 60 days of ordering to schedule your installation date.

Site requirements before the crew arrives: a flat, level surface (within 2-3 inches), clear access for a delivery truck, and any permit posted or available. Concrete pads are preferred but not required for ground or gravel installations. The installation crew typically completes a standard single or two-car carport in 3 to 6 hours. Larger triple-wide or tall-clearance units may require a full day.

Balance payment is made directly to the manufacturer after your carport is installed and you are satisfied with the result. Financing and rent-to-own options are available through Steel and Stud for customers who prefer monthly payments. View financing options or request your free quote to get started today.

Related Metal Building Categories

Looking for something larger or more enclosed? Explore our full range: enclosed steel garages from $3,195, metal barns for agricultural use, tall clearance RV and boat covers, barndominium shells for combined living and working space, and all commercial steel building types. Every product category includes the same factory-direct pricing and professional service.

Ready to Protect Your Vehicles with a Steel Carport?

Join 15,000+ property owners who chose Steel and Stud. Factory-direct pricing with free delivery and installation on all tubular steel orders.

View Cart